WO2007108212A1 - Periodic structure and method for manufacturing periodic structure and application product - Google Patents
Periodic structure and method for manufacturing periodic structure and application product Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2007108212A1 WO2007108212A1 PCT/JP2007/000239 JP2007000239W WO2007108212A1 WO 2007108212 A1 WO2007108212 A1 WO 2007108212A1 JP 2007000239 W JP2007000239 W JP 2007000239W WO 2007108212 A1 WO2007108212 A1 WO 2007108212A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- periodic structure
- light
- incident
- plane
- parallel
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Ceased
Links
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10F—INORGANIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES SENSITIVE TO INFRARED RADIATION, LIGHT, ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION OF SHORTER WAVELENGTH OR CORPUSCULAR RADIATION
- H10F77/00—Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass
- H10F77/70—Surface textures, e.g. pyramid structures
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
- B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
- B82Y20/00—Nanooptics, e.g. quantum optics or photonic crystals
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/02—Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating
- G02B6/02057—Optical fibres with cladding with or without a coating comprising gratings
- G02B6/02076—Refractive index modulation gratings, e.g. Bragg gratings
- G02B6/02123—Refractive index modulation gratings, e.g. Bragg gratings characterised by the method of manufacture of the grating
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/10—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
- G02B6/12—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind
- G02B6/12007—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind forming wavelength selective elements, e.g. multiplexer, demultiplexer
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/10—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type
- G02B6/12—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings of the optical waveguide type of the integrated circuit kind
- G02B6/122—Basic optical elements, e.g. light-guiding paths
- G02B6/1225—Basic optical elements, e.g. light-guiding paths comprising photonic band-gap structures or photonic lattices
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/35—Non-linear optics
- G02F1/353—Frequency conversion, i.e. wherein a light beam is generated with frequency components different from those of the incident light beams
- G02F1/3544—Particular phase matching techniques
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H10—SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H10F—INORGANIC SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES SENSITIVE TO INFRARED RADIATION, LIGHT, ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION OF SHORTER WAVELENGTH OR CORPUSCULAR RADIATION
- H10F77/00—Constructional details of devices covered by this subclass
- H10F77/10—Semiconductor bodies
- H10F77/14—Shape of semiconductor bodies; Shapes, relative sizes or dispositions of semiconductor regions within semiconductor bodies
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F2201/00—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00
- G02F2201/30—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00 grating
- G02F2201/305—Constructional arrangements not provided for in groups G02F1/00 - G02F7/00 grating diffraction grating
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F2203/00—Function characteristic
- G02F2203/07—Polarisation dependent
Definitions
- Periodic structure Periodic structure, method for producing periodic structure, and applied product
- the present invention relates to a periodic structure having a period of about the optical wavelength and a method for manufacturing the same.
- the present invention also relates to a method for controlling propagation of electromagnetic waves, particularly light using the periodic structure, and applied products.
- Non-Patent Document 4 and Non-Patent Document 5 explain the coupling between the anti-symmetric mode (odd symmetric mode) of self-cloning P h C (hereinafter abbreviated as “AC-PhC”) and external plane waves. Has been.
- Patent Document 1 JP 2001-091701 A
- Patent Document 2 JP 2004-279713 A
- Patent Document 3 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-146064
- Patent Document 4 Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-111806
- Patent Document 5 US Patent No. 3631288
- Patent Document 6 US Patent No. 5172267
- Non-Patent Document 1 Ohtaka, PHYSICAL REVIEW B, Vol.19, No.10, pp.5057-5067,
- Non-Patent Document 2 Supervised by Akihiro Kawakami, "Photonic crystal technology and its applications” Shimushi Publishing Co., Ltd., 2002
- Non-patent document 3 FY2003 Patent Application Technology Trend Survey Optical Integrated Circuit, March 2004, Japan Patent Office
- Non-Patent Document 4 Hiroshi Honma et al., "Coupling of anti-symmetric modes and external plane waves in photonic crystals", 2004 Fall 65th JSAP Conference on Applied Physics, September 2004
- Non-Patent Document 5 Hiroshi Honma et al., "Optical attenuator using antisymmetric mode of photonic crystal", Society Conference of IEICE, September 2004
- Non-Patent Document 6 Takayuki Kawashima et al., "Fabrication of 2-D Photonic Crystal Polarization Separation Element and Its High Performance", IEICE Technical Committee on Optical Electronics, 0PE99-109
- Non-Patent Document 7 Edited by Yasuhiro Ayukawa, "Latest Solar Power Generation Technology and System", CMC Corporation, 2000
- the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a method for realizing a light propagation form that has been difficult or impossible in the past and an application thereof.
- the first invention is:
- a periodic structure consisting of two or more types of media whose refractive index is greater than 1.2. There is a combination in which the ratio of the refractive index between the contained media is greater than 1: 1.2, which constitutes the basic unit cell.
- the first to third basic translation vectors including any axis perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second basic translation vectors, and a plane parallel to the first basic translation vector and Z Or the distribution of the dielectric constant or refractive index in the unit structure and the Z or basic unit scale are non-mirror symmetric with respect to the plane parallel to the second basic translational vector.
- a periodic structure whose dielectric constant changes periodically.
- the second invention is:
- the first or second basic translation of the first to third basic translation vectors that make up the basic unit cell, where the refractive index or refractive index distribution and Z or the basic unit cell are non-rotationally symmetric and non-inverted symmetric Be non-mirror-symmetric with respect to a plane containing any axis orthogonal to the plane containing the vector and parallel to the first basic translation vector and to a plane parallel to the Z or second basic translation vector A periodic structure having a periodically changing refractive index or dielectric constant.
- the third invention provides
- the fourth invention is:
- the periodic structure according to any one of the first to third inventions characterized in that the second basic translation vector can have any length that is not zero.
- the fifth invention provides
- the angle formed by the plane containing any two of the first to third basic translation vectors and the remaining one of the basic translation vectors is greater than 60 degrees ⁇ 90 degrees
- the sixth invention provides
- the periodic structure is formed by laminating a plurality of thin films, the thin film layer has a periodic concavo-convex structure, and the convex portion in the concavo-convex structure is a convex portion having a plurality of distances from the top to the bottom.
- the periodic structure according to any one of the first to fifth inventions.
- the seventh invention provides
- the length of at least one basic translation vector is from 100 nm to 100 nm, and at least one of the media included in the unit structure has a refractive index of 2 or more.
- the periodic structure according to any one of the first to sixth inventions.
- the eighth invention provides
- the ninth invention provides
- the electromagnetic field includes any axis perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second basic translation vectors, and is parallel to the plane parallel to the first basic translation vector and Z or the second basic translation vector.
- the tenth aspect of the invention is:
- the electromagnetic field includes any axis perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second basic translation vectors, and the plane parallel to the first basic translation vector and the Z or second Non-mirror symmetry with respect to a plane parallel to the basic translation vector, and having an eigenmode having no rotational symmetry three or more times with respect to the axis.
- the periodic structure according to any one of the seventh invention.
- the first invention is as follows:
- An electromagnetic wave beam incident at a predetermined angle on a surface including any two of the first to third basic translation vectors is propagated in a direction parallel to the surface, or the The periodic structure according to any one of the first to tenth aspects of the present invention, wherein the periodic structure and the air are propagated at an angle greater than a critical angle with respect to the surface.
- the first and second inventions are:
- the periodic structure according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects, wherein the incident beam is branched into a plurality of beams propagating in parallel to each other.
- the first invention is the
- the beam propagation direction described in the first invention or the beam branching direction described in the first invention is the direction of the first or second basic translation vector or the first to third basics.
- the 14th invention is as follows:
- the cross-sectional area or volume of the basic unit lattice is the same, and one basic translation vector included in each is the same, and the unit The type and composition ratio of the medium in the structure are the same, and the center value of the energy corresponding to the wavelength of the antisymmetric mode of the periodic unit structure with mirror-symmetric basic unit cell and unit structure is ⁇ 3 O o /
- the first seventeenth invention is:
- the periodic structure according to any one of the first to the sixteenth inventions, wherein the medium in the periodic structure contains a transparent conductor material, and the periodic structure has electrical conductivity. .
- the eighteenth aspect of the invention is:
- the periodic structure according to any one of the first to seventeenth aspects, wherein the medium in the periodic structure contains a fluid and a solid.
- the nineteenth invention is
- the periodic structure according to any one of the first to eighteenth inventions, wherein a part of the medium in the unit structure contains either a nonlinear optical material or a luminescent substance.
- the 20th invention is a first invention.
- the second invention is a first invention
- a composite periodic structure comprising the periodic structure according to any one of the first to nineteenth aspects of the invention and a uniform medium connected to the periodic structure.
- the second invention is as follows:
- the average incident direction of deposited particles or etched particles to the substrate is not perpendicular to the substrate surface
- the angle formed by the direction in which the incident direction is projected onto the substrate surface and the direction of the periodicity is in a range of 0 to 45 degrees
- the second invention is as follows:
- the periodic structure or composite periodic structure according to any one of the first to second inventions, a light source, a polarizer, a reflective polarization separation element, a walk-off polarization separation element, a reflection means, a phase plate, and diffraction
- a device comprising at least one selected from the group consisting of a grating, a scatterer, a spatial light modulator, an electrode, a photoreceptor, and a light receiver.
- the 24th invention is as follows:
- a parallel beam source a periodic structure according to any of the first to fourth inventions, and a reflective polarization separation element,
- a plane including any two of the first to third basic translation vectors in the periodic structure and the reflective polarization separation element are parallel to each other;
- the beam incident from the laser light source is branched into a plurality of beams propagating in the same direction as the incident light and in parallel with each other,
- the spatial light modulator transmits or reflects at least one of the plurality of branched beams
- the device wherein the plurality of beams including at least a beam transmitted or reflected by the spatial light modulator are collected by the lens at the same location on the photoconductor.
- the incident beam can be split into two parallel beams having almost the same polarization state or three or more beams.
- FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a periodic structure as an example.
- FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a basic unit cell and a unit structure of the periodic structure shown in FIG. Fig. 2 (a) is a diagram showing the basic unit cell, and Fig. 2 (b) is a diagram showing the unit structure.
- FIG. 3 shows a basic unit cell and a unit structure of a periodic structure.
- Fig. 3 (a) shows the basic unit cell
- Fig. 3 (b) shows the unit structure.
- FIG. 4 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure having an infinite period formed by the basic unit cell shown in FIG.
- FIG. 5 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure having an infinite period by the basic unit cell shown in FIG.
- Fig. 6 shows the ZX plane of a periodic structure with an infinite period using the basic unit cell shown in Fig. 3. It is a band diagram with the horizontal axis representing the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from a direction that is parallel to the surface and tilted 10 degrees from the Z axis.
- FIG. 7 is a band diagram with the horizontal axis representing the wavelength of the TM polarization incident from the Z direction of the infinite periodic structure having the basic unit cell shown in FIG.
- FIG. 8 is a band diagram with the horizontal axis representing the wavelength of the TM polarization incident from the Z direction of the infinite periodic structure having the basic unit cell shown in FIG.
- Fig. 9 shows the wavelength of the TM polarized wave incident from the direction tilted 10 degrees from the Z axis parallel to the ZX plane of the periodic structure with infinite period by the basic unit cell shown in Fig. 3. It is the band figure made into an axis.
- FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a self-cloning type two-dimensional photonic crystal and propagation of emitted light when a parallel beam is perpendicularly incident on the crystal.
- Fig. 10 (a) is a side view and Fig. 10 (b) is a front view.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the propagation of outgoing light when a self-cloning type two-dimensional photonic crystal and a parallel beam are obliquely incident on the crystal with a small incident angle.
- Fig. 11 (a) is a side view and Fig. 11 (b) is a front view.
- FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a self-cloning type two-dimensional photonic crystal and propagation of emitted light when a parallel beam is perpendicularly incident on the crystal.
- Fig. 12 (a) is a front view and Fig. 12 (b) is a side view.
- FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a self-cloning type two-dimensional photonic crystal and propagation of emitted light when a parallel beam is incident on the crystal.
- FIG. 13 (a) is a front view
- FIG. 13 (b) is a side view.
- FIG. 14 is a model diagram in which the propagation of light between the “AC-2DPhC” 1001, the one-dimensional multilayer film 1003 and the air formed on the substrate 1002 shown in FIG. 10 is enlarged.
- FIG. 15 is an enlarged model of the light propagation between “AC-2DPhC” 1401, the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403 and air formed on the substrate 1402 shown in FIG.
- Figure 16 shows the basic translation vector in self-cloning photonic crystals.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a model of a unit structure in which a basic unit lattice in which all the tols are orthogonal and a medium distribution is biased.
- FIG. 16 (a) is a diagram showing a basic unit cell, and
- FIG. 16 (b) is a diagram showing a unit structure.
- FIG. 17 is a front view showing a substrate and the direction of deposited particles or etching particles incident on the substrate.
- FIG. 18 is a top view showing the substrate and the direction of the deposited particles or etching particles incident on the substrate.
- FIG. 19 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the target and the substrate.
- FIG. 20 is a front view and a side view showing the positional relationship between the target and the substrate, and the incident direction of the deposited particles, etching particles, or etching particles.
- FIG. 20 (a) is a front view
- FIG. 20 (b) is a side view.
- FIG. 21 is a schematic perspective view showing the substrate 124 shown in FIG.
- FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the substrate 124 and the shaping layer 112 shown in FIG.
- Figure 23 shows the actual 2D self-cloning photonic crystal (2
- FIG. 24 is a transmission characteristic graph.
- Figure 24 (a) shows the characteristics corresponding to the case where the incident beam is TE-polarized
- Figure 24 (b) shows the characteristics corresponding to the case where the incident beam is TM-polarized.
- FIG. 25 is a side view showing the basic structure of a hodara-frac recording apparatus.
- FIG. 26 is a side view showing the operation during recording.
- FIG. 27 is a side view showing an operation during reproduction.
- FIG. 28 is a view showing H B S used in Example 2.
- FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a polarization-compensating optical integrator and propagation of incoming and outgoing light.
- FIG. 30 is a schematic side view of a “2D-collapsed ACPCj-based photoelectric conversion device based on a-SiC and thin-film polycrystalline silicon.
- FIG. 31 shows the basic unit cell and unit structure of “2D-collapse ACPC” 3003 shown in FIG. Fig. 31 (a) shows the basic unit cell, and Fig. 31 (b) shows the unit structure.
- Fig. 32 shows three-dimensional photonics produced using Ti0 2 , Sn0 2 , and iodine solutions. It is sectional drawing of a crystal.
- FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a periodic structure and peripheral members as an example.
- a region 101 to a region 111 occupied by a medium having a refractive index n1 ⁇ 21.5, and a region 113 to a region 123 occupied by a medium having a refractive index n 4 shown by hatching form a periodic structure.
- Reference numeral 124 denotes a substrate
- reference numeral 112 denotes an intermediate layer (shaping layer) between the substrate and the periodic structure.
- FIG. 1 is a kind of multilayer thin film, and the film thicknesses of the region 101 to the region 111 are each about 150 nm, and the film thicknesses of the region 113 to the region 123 are each about 100 nm.
- FIG. Fig. 2 shows the basic unit cell (prim is ive eel and abbreviated as ⁇ P r C) and unit structure (basis, abbreviated as "BAS”) of the periodic structure shown in Fig. 1.
- FIG. Fig. 2 (a) is a diagram showing P r C.
- the first primitive translation vector (hereinafter abbreviated as ⁇ ⁇ Vj) 201 is 41 Onm in length and parallel to the X direction.
- the PT V202 is 251 nm long, has an angle of 86 degrees with respect to the XY plane, and is parallel to the ZX plane.
- the third P TV is parallel to the Y axis and the length is arbitrary (undefined).
- indefinite length means that the distribution of the medium in the BAS is uniform in the Y direction, and that the length of the PTV cannot be defined uniquely (arbitrary).
- Reference numerals 203 to 206 denote lattice points.
- Fig. 2 (b) is a diagram showing BAS, which is a cross-sectional view in a plane parallel to the plane containing the first PT V201 containing the midpoint of the third PTV and the second PTV202.
- region 208 and region 209 are continuous, and BAS is essentially composed of two regions.
- the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 is a kind of two-dimensional self-cloning photonic crystal (hereinafter abbreviated as “AC-2DPhC”).
- PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 or the periodic structure by PrC and BAS, which is an extension of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 to a three-dimensional periodic structure, is described above.
- the first to seventh inventions will be described. Note that Pr C and BAS shown in Fig. 2 in which P r C and BAS are expanded to a three-dimensional periodic structure have the same cross-sectional view in the YZ plane as in Fig. 2 and the cross-sectional view in the XY plane as in Fig. P r C and BAS are the same.
- the first invention can be explained by P r C and BAS shown in FIG.
- PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 selects PTV201 as the first PTV and PTV of indefinite length parallel to the Y axis as the second PTV.
- the plane containing the first and second PTV in C (here, the XY plane) Is parallel to the second PTV (in this case, parallel to the YZ plane, where X is arbitrary).
- any of the refractive index distributions in BAS cannot be mirrored, while containing any axis orthogonal to the plane containing the first and second P TVs in P r C
- the plane parallel to the first PTV201 (here the plane parallel to the ZX plane, Y is arbitrary) is the plane containing the midpoint of the length of the second PTV, and the refractive index in PrC and BAS This is because it becomes a mirror surface for any of the distributions.
- the second invention can be explained by the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in FIG. This is because the refractive index distribution in BAS is non-rotational and non-inversion symmetric. P r C has two-fold rotational symmetry. Also, “The distribution of dielectric constant or refractive index in the unit structure and Z or basic unit cell is non-rotation symmetric, non-inversion symmetry” means that the unit can be rotated or inverted with respect to any axis or point. Either the distribution of dielectric constant and refractive index in the structure and the basic unit lattice are not the same as the original, or the distribution of either dielectric constant and refractive index in the unit structure or the basic unit lattice is the same as the original It means not to be.
- the third invention relates to an example in which the refractive index distribution in BAS in which PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 are expanded to a three-dimensional periodic structure has no symmetry except translation. it can. Since it is a periodic structure, it naturally has translational symmetry. The description for the refractive index also holds for the dielectric constant ⁇ .
- the fourth invention can be explained by an example in which the second ⁇ V can take any length that is not the opening in PrC and BAS shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that the distribution of the medium in B A S is uniform in the direction of the second P T V and has so-called continuous translational symmetry.
- the fifth invention can be described with reference to FIG. This is because the angle between the plane containing the first and second PTV shown in Fig. 2 (a) (parallel to the XY plane) and the remaining third PT V is 86 degrees, greater than 60 degrees and 90 degrees This is because the surface including any two P TVs among the first to third P TVs remains and remains 1
- the angle formed by two PTVs is preferably greater than 65 degrees and smaller than 85 degrees, more preferably greater than 75 degrees and less than 85 degrees.
- the electromagnetic waves incident on the surface of the periodic structure which is a plane parallel to the plane including the first and third PTVs, in the eleventh invention to be described later, This is advantageous because it propagates with a larger ratio in the direction parallel to the plane containing the PTV. If the angle is greater than 75 degrees and smaller than 85 degrees, the manufacture according to the 22nd invention described later is easy, and the 11th invention described later is a plane parallel to the plane including the first and third PTVs. This is advantageous because electromagnetic waves incident on the surface of a periodic structure can propagate with a larger ratio in a direction parallel to the plane including the first and third PTVs.
- the sixth invention can be explained by a periodic structure formed by laminating thin films having a plurality of concavo-convex structures in the Z-axis direction as shown in FIG.
- the vertexes 211 and 212 correspond to the lowermost portion of the convex portion. Since the distance between the vertex 210 and the vertex 211 is different from the distance between the vertex 210 and the vertex 212, there are two types (plurality) of distances from the top to the bottom of the convex portion. This form is one of the simplest ways to break the symmetry of BAS. Further, as will be described later, there is the following relationship between the length of the first and third PTVs and the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave (light) indicating the propagation characterizing the eleventh or twelfth invention.
- the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave (light) indicating the propagation characterizing the 11th or 12th invention is a value obtained by multiplying the first PTV by the refractive index of the medium having the largest refractive index contained in the BAS (for example, FIG. 1).
- the wavelength is about 980 nm) or less, preferably a value obtained by multiplying the first PTV by the weighted average of the refractive index of the medium contained in the BAS (for example, the periodic structure shown in FIG. 1).
- the wavelength is about 760 nm or less, more preferably less than the value obtained by multiplying the first PTV by the weighted average of the refractive index of the medium contained in the BAS and included in the BAS for the third PTV.
- the first PTV is 410 nm
- the second PTV is indefinite (optional)
- the third PTV is about 251 nm.
- the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave incident on the surface of the periodic structure which is a plane parallel to the plane including the first and second PTVs in the first aspect of the invention described later, is In the ultraviolet region, the thickness is preferably 100 nm to 400 nm, more preferably 150 nm to 350 nm.
- the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave is in the visible light region, it is preferably 200 nm to 700 nm, more preferably 350 nm to 500 nm.
- the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave is in the near infrared region, it is preferably 300 nm to 1000 nm, more preferably 400 nm to 700 nm.
- P r C is defined by a general selection of P r C with the best symmetry, with the exception.
- FIG. 3 is a kind of P r C and BAS of the periodic structure.
- Figure 3 (a) shows P r C.
- the length of the first PT V301 is 41 Onm, parallel to the X direction, and the length of the second PT V302 is 251 nm with respect to the Z axis.
- the third P T V is parallel to the Y axis and the length is arbitrary (undefined).
- Indefinite length means that the distribution of the medium in BAS is uniform in the Y direction, and the length of PTV cannot be uniquely defined (optional).
- Reference numerals 303 to 306 are lattice points.
- FIG. 3 (b) is a diagram showing the BAS, and is a cross-sectional view in a plane parallel to the plane including the first and second PTVs including the midpoint of the third PTV.
- region 3 08 and region 309 are contiguous, and BAS consists essentially of two regions.
- the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 10 is a kind of AC-2DPhC.
- P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 3 and P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 2 are the hexahedrons formed by P r C with the same first and third PTV lengths. The volume is the same. Moreover, the refractive index and the filling rate of all the contained media are the same.
- PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 3 are mirror-symmetric with respect to the plane including the axis perpendicular to the plane containing PT V301 and PT V302 and the midpoint of PT V301, and two rotational symmetry. And inversion symmetry.
- FIG. 4 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure with an infinite period due to PrC shown in FIG.
- a large point (thick line) represents the symmetric mode
- a small point (thin line) represents the anti-symmetric mode.
- the first band of the antisymmetric mode exists from the wavelength of about 680 nm to the wavelength of about 790 nm
- the second band of the antisymmetric mode exists from the wavelength of about 440 nm to the wavelength of about 540 nm
- the third band of the antisymmetric mode is about the wavelength. Present below 430nm.
- the third band of antisymmetric mode overlaps with the band of even symmetric mode.
- FIG. 5 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of the TE polarization incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure with an infinite period due to PrC shown in FIG.
- Fig. 6 is a band diagram with the horizontal axis representing the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from a direction tilted by 10 degrees from the Z axis and parallel to the ZX plane of the periodic structure with infinite period due to PrC shown in Fig. 3. is there.
- FIG. 6 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis indicates the wavelength of the TM polarization incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure having an infinite period due to PrC shown in FIG.
- a large point (thick line) represents the symmetric mode
- a small point (thin line) represents the anti-symmetric mode.
- the first band of the antisymmetric mode exists from a wavelength of about 580 nm to a wavelength of about 720 nm
- the second band of the antisymmetric mode exists from a wavelength of about 400 nm to a wavelength of about 550 nm.
- the second band of antisymmetric mode almost overlaps with the band of even symmetric mode.
- FIG. 7 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of the TM polarized wave incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure having an infinite period due to PrC shown in FIG.
- Figure 8 shows the P r shown in Figure 3. It is a band diagram with the horizontal axis of the TM polarization wavelength incident from a direction parallel to the ZX plane of the periodic structure with an infinite period by c and tilted 10 degrees from the Z axis.
- the eighth invention can be explained by all the bands in the band diagrams shown in Figs. All bands in the band diagrams shown in Fig. 5 and Fig. 8 cannot distinguish between symmetric and antisymmetric modes. This includes any axis (axis parallel to the Z axis in FIG. 2) perpendicular to the plane where P r C and BAS already contain the first and second PTV (XY plane in FIG. 2), and the second Because it is non-mirror-symmetric with respect to a plane parallel to the PTV (parallel to the YZ plane), the eigenmode of the electromagnetic field is also non-mirror-symmetric with respect to the plane.
- the ninth invention can be explained by all the bands in the band diagrams shown in Figs. Similarly, P r C and BAS are in any direction perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second PTV (XY plane in Fig. 2) (axis parallel to the Z axis in Fig. 2). And because BAS is already non-rotation symmetric, the eigenmodes of the electromagnetic field are also non-rotation symmetric about the axis.
- P r C and BAS already include an arbitrary axis (axis parallel to the Z axis in FIG. 2) perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second PTVs (the XY plane in FIG. 2), and Since it is non-mirror symmetric with respect to the plane parallel to the second PTV (parallel to the YZ plane) and non-rotationally symmetric with respect to the axis, the eigenmode of the electromagnetic field is not affected by this plane regardless of the direction of excitation. On the other hand, it is non-mirrored and has no rotational symmetry of 3 or more times with respect to the axis.
- the band diagram shown in Fig. 4 has an even symmetric mode (Even) band and an antisymmetric mode (Odd) band.
- the symmetric mode band and the antisymmetric mode band exist.
- the two band diagrams are almost identical in terms of the inclination of each band, the frequency of folding, the frequency where the band gap exists, etc.
- the band in Fig. 5 that corresponds to the band of antisymmetric mode in Fig. 4 is called the band of antisymmetric like mode.
- the band in Fig. 5 corresponding to the even symmetric mode band in Fig. 4 is also called the even symmetric like mode band.
- the band edge where the antisymmetric like mode band exists with respect to the antisymmetric mode band has a frequency deviation of about 7%. If the angle between the plane containing the first P T V and the third P T V in Figure 2 and the second P T V is even smaller, the difference in frequency is even greater. For PrC and BAS similar to those in Fig. 2, a deviation of about ⁇ 30% is possible.
- the light propagation direction in (A) and the light branching direction in (E) are: ⁇ direction of first P TV and vice versa, and Z or “second P TV Direction and its opposite direction ”or“ direction in which the third PTV is projected on the first and second PTV and its opposite direction ”(corresponding to the thirteenth invention).
- the beam splitting interval depends on the size of the in-plane period, the refractive index and wavelength of the medium, the substrate material, and the thickness.
- FIG. 2 shows the result of investigating the propagation by entering a parallel beam with a selected polarization direction into the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in FIG. 2 formed on the substrate.
- FIG. 10 shows a wavelength of 532 nm at the center of “AC-2DPhC” 1001 formed on the substrate. It is a figure which shows propagation
- Fig. 10 (a) is a side view and Fig. 10 (b) is a front view.
- AC-2DPhC 1001 is laminated on a 0.5-thick fused quartz substrate 1002, and is uniform (one period) in the Y-axis direction. At the same time, a one-dimensional (planar) multilayer film 1003 is also laminated on the substrate 1002.
- reference numeral 1004 indicates an incident parallel beam
- reference numerals 1005 to 1014 indicate output beams.
- reference numeral 1015 denotes “incident position and outgoing position of the incident parallel beam 1004 in AC-2DPhC 1001
- reference numerals 1016 and 1017 denote“ exit position of outgoing beam in AC-2DPhC 1001.
- Reference numeral 1018 denotes ⁇ C-2DPhCj Defect region existing in 1001
- reference numeral 1019 represents a scatterer applied to the surface layer of the one-dimensional multilayer film portion.
- FIG. 1 1 shows "AC-2DPhC" 1001 formed on the substrate and a parallel beam having a Gaussian intensity distribution with a laser beam having a wavelength of 532 nm at the center of "AC-2DPhC" 1001.
- FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the propagation of outgoing light when the light beam is obliquely incident with a small incident angle. The incident surface is parallel to the Z X plane.
- Fig. 11 (a) is a side view and Fig. 11 (b) is a front view.
- reference numeral 1101 denotes an incident parallel beam
- reference numerals 1102 to 1107 denote output beams
- reference numeral 1108 denotes the incident position and outgoing position of the incident parallel beam in “AC-2DPhC” 1001
- reference numerals 1 109 and 1 110 denote the outgoing position of the outgoing beam in “AC-2DPhC” 1001.
- the branching interval of the light propagating to the transmission side changes with the incident angle to the maximum at the time of vertical incidence.
- the traveling direction of the beam propagating to the reflection side was the same as the direction indicated by the law of reflection in geometric optics. Furthermore, it was possible to change the intensity ratio of the beam propagating in the same direction by changing the incident angle on both the transmission side and the reflection side.
- the beam splitting interval at the same incident angle has a linear function relationship up to a predetermined wavelength.
- the ratio of the beam that follows normal geometric optics to the branched light is smaller when TE polarized light is incident than when TM polarized light is incident (more branched light), and at 473 nm, the normal geometric optics is used. It was confirmed that the ratio of the beam following the beam to the branched light was larger (with less branched light) when the TE polarized light was incident than when the TM polarized light was incident.
- the branching itself occurs with both T E and T M polarizations, but the intensity of the branching light varies depending on the polarization, and the ratio of the beam and the branching light according to ordinary geometrical optics also depends on the wavelength.
- the angle formed between the output beam 101 1 and the output beam 1 013 also changed depending on the wavelength.
- FIG. 12 shows a case where a parallel beam having a Gaussian intensity distribution by a laser beam having a wavelength of 532 nm is vertically incident on “AC-2DPhC” 1201 formed on a substrate 1202 and “AC-2DPhC” 1201. It is a figure which shows propagation of the emitted light.
- Fig. 12 (a) is a side view and Fig. 12 (b) is a front view.
- reference numeral 1203 denotes a planar multilayer film in which the medium is continuous with “AC-2DPhC” 1201
- reference numeral 1204 denotes an incident parallel beam
- reference numerals 1205 to 1215 denote output beams.
- Reference numeral 1216 indicates the incident position and exit position of the incident parallel beam in “AC-2DPhC” 1201
- reference numerals 1217 and 1218 indicate the exit position of the exit beam in “AC-2DPhC” 1201.
- “AC-2DPhC” 1201 should be a part of “AC-2DPhC” 1001 cleaved.
- the one-dimensional multilayer film part acts as a weak light confinement mechanism for in-plane propagation light. It can also be seen that the space (uniform) outside the cleaved end face also becomes a light confinement mechanism.
- Figure 13 shows the propagation of the emitted light when a parallel beam with a Gaussian intensity distribution by a laser beam with a wavelength of 532 nm is vertically incident on the "AC-2DPhC" 1201 formed on the substrate 1202 shown in Figure 12
- FIG. Fig. 13 (a) is a front view and Fig. 13 (b) is a side view.
- reference numeral 1301 denotes an incident parallel beam
- reference numerals 1302 to 1305 denote light transmitted in the thin film surface
- reference numerals 1306 to 1308 denote output beams.
- Fig. 13 shows only characteristic light propagation.
- the Pr C and BAS shown in Fig. 2 are similar, and the first PTV is made of AC-2DPhC consisting of 350 nm of P r C and BAS on a fused silica substrate with a thickness of 0.5 mm.
- the branching interval of 1.7 mm was confirmed at a wavelength of 405 nm.
- no branching was observed at any of the wavelengths 473 nm, 532 nm, and 660 nm.
- FIG. 14 is a model diagram in which light propagation between the “AC-2DPhC” 1001, the one-dimensional multilayer film 1003 and the air formed on the substrate 1002 shown in FIG. 10 is enlarged.
- reference numeral 1401 represents AC-2DPhC
- reference numeral 1402 represents a quartz substrate
- reference numeral 1403 represents a one-dimensional multilayer film
- reference numeral 1404 represents incident light
- reference numerals 1405 to 1423 represent light rays.
- Light ray 1404 incident from the air is the first-order diffracted light 1405 to 1408, light ray 1409 following Snell's law inside AC-2DPhC1401, and light ray propagating parallel to the film of AC-2DPhC 1401 141 1 to 1412, branched to reflected light (not shown).
- the first-order diffracted light beam 1405 is totally reflected at the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and air, and then enters the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and substrate 1402. At this interface, it is branched into reflected light and transmitted light 1416.
- the first-order diffracted light beam 1406 enters the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and the substrate 1402, and is split into reflected light beam 1414 and transmitted light beam 1415.
- the first-order diffracted light beam 1407 is totally reflected at the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and air, and then enters the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403. At this interface, the light is branched into reflected light 1419 and transmitted light 1420.
- ⁇ Metal material is used for the substrate. Or through a metal layer between the substrate and the periodic structure
- a material having a low refractive index is used as the substrate.
- FIG. 15 is a model diagram in which the propagation of light between the “AC-2DPhC” 1401, the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403 and the air formed on the substrate 1402 shown in FIG. 14 is enlarged.
- reference numerals 1501 to 1502, 1504 to 1509, and 151 1 denote light beams, respectively.
- reference numeral 1510 is the interface between substrate 1402 and one-dimensional multilayer film 1 403.
- the light 1423 transmitted through the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and the substrate 1402 enters the interface between the substrate 1402 and the air and is totally reflected.
- the light enters the interface between the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403 and the substrate 1402 and is totally reflected. Therefore, the light beam 1423 is confined in the substrate 1402.
- in-plane propagation occurs in the second band of antisymmetric like mode in Fig. 5 corresponding to the second band of antisymmetric mode in Fig. 4.
- the first band of the antisymmetric like mode in Fig. 5 which corresponds to the first band of the antisymmetric mode, the same propagation as that of the bulk plate made of a homogeneous medium occurs.
- the band structure near the wavelength where the first band of antisymmetric like mode exists is the same as the band structure near the wavelength where the first band of antisymmetric mode exists in Fig. 4.
- the band structure in the vicinity of the wavelength where the first band of the like-like mode exists has a large deviation from the band structure in the vicinity of the wavelength where the second band of the anti-symmetric mode of vertical growth exists.
- Fig. 16 is a diagram showing a model of BAS in which the distribution of P r C and the medium distribution of PTV in AC-PhC are all orthogonal to each other.
- Fig. 16 (a) is a graph showing P r C.
- the first PT V1601 is parallel to the X direction and has a length of 410 nm
- the second PT V1602 is parallel to the Z direction and has a length of 410 nm. 250 nm.
- the third PTV is parallel to the Y axis and the length is arbitrary (undefined).
- Reference numerals 1603 to 1606 denote lattice points.
- FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a model of BAS in which the distribution of P r C and the medium distribution of PTV in AC-PhC are all orthogonal to each other.
- Fig. 16 (a) is a graph showing P r C.
- the first PT V1601 is parallel to the X direction and has a
- 16 (b) is a diagram showing the BAS, which is a cross-sectional view in a plane parallel to the ZX plane.
- region 1608 and region 1609 are continuous, and BAS is essentially composed of two regions.
- the periodic structure corresponding to the first to tenth inventions is not limited to the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in FIG.
- P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 16 or P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 16 are three-dimensionally extended and the periodic structure corresponding to the first to tenth is also used. is there.
- the corresponding periodic structure is limited to BAS with a biased medium distribution.
- the band structure of the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 16 is similar to the band structure of the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2.
- BAS is limited by the electron's orbit in crystals with a periodic arrangement of atoms, whereas in P h C, the constituent medium itself retains its shape, so basically only if it meets the manufacturing process. There is no limit.
- the periodic structure showing the light propagation has an uneven appearance similar to the play of color seen in gem opal.
- the periodic structure described in Non-Patent Document 4 is transparent. It had a uniform appearance (similar to translucent colored glass), although it had a color reflecting the reflection spectrum.
- H-type propagation the propagation of light from (A) to (J) is collectively referred to as H-type propagation. Also, when referring to individual items in H-type propagation, for example, when referring to (A) above, it is abbreviated as H-type propagation (A).
- the following assistive technology may be added to the first to fifteenth inventions.
- the light propagation described in H type propagation (A) to H type propagation (D) occurs.
- (L) there is a close relationship with the antisymmetric mode of a similar structure having a mirror surface, and controlling the wavelength in which the band of the antisymmetric mode exists can control the H-type propagation (A) ⁇
- A means to control the wavelength at which the light propagation described in H type propagation (D) occurs.
- 3D P h C is used as the first effective method.
- 3D P h C is more advantageous than 2D P h C because the number of anti-symmetric mode bands increases as the number of directions with discrete translational symmetry and period size increases. .
- each PTV has a different length.
- B AS including a medium having three or more kinds of refractive indexes is used. This means can be realized by using three or more types of media and setting the manufacturing conditions appropriately.
- refractive index modulation exists twice or more in the light traveling direction.
- the refractive index modulation exists twice.
- the fourth effective method is to optimize the parameter of PrC so that the photonic band gap is narrow, the band is folded back, and the group velocity of light in the antisymmetric mode band is reduced.
- silicon hereinafter referred to as S i
- S i C silicon carbide
- n p-type semiconductor
- a pin junction can be formed by forming an intrinsic semiconductor layer (i layer) and an n- type semiconductor layer ( n layer) on the Si. Since the refractive index of the i layer and n layer in the Si is almost the same, the periodic structure with two media for light Act as a body.
- the periodic structure in this case has electrical conductivity in the Z direction. Since the refractive indexes of S i C and Sn0 2 are almost the same, they behave as a periodic structure with two media for light.
- the eighteenth aspect of the invention can be explained by an example in which one medium is a fluid (gas, liquid) and the other medium is a solid among the medium of the periodic structure showing H-type propagation.
- the fluid includes air, liquid, etc. If it is a fluid, it can be moved in and out of the periodic structure, and the H-type propagation or E-branch (E) branching occurs when the fluid is replaced. The interval can be changed.
- H-type propagation (A) to (D) it is the effect of confining light within the periodic structure.
- the electric field strength in the periodic structure increases, and the interaction between the medium and light can be increased compared to a homogeneous medium. That is, if the constituent medium of the periodic structure has an optical polarizability having nonlinearity, the efficiency of the nonlinear optical effect can be increased.
- the constituent medium of the periodic structure contains a light-absorbing substance, the absorption efficiency can be increased.
- the other medium combined with the nonlinear optical material, light emitting substance, and light amplifying substance is a nonlinear optical material, light emitting substance, light. It is desirable that the refractive index be lower than that of the amplifying material.
- the peripheral structure of the periodic structure also serves as a means for controlling the propagation of light.
- the following three types of periodic structures are available as effective periodic structures.
- the twentieth invention can be explained by a combination of “AC-2DPhC” 1001 and planar multilayer film 1003 shown in FIG. 10, for example.
- “AC-2DPhC” 1001 has a substantial period in two directions, and the planar multilayer film 1003 has a substantial period only in one direction in the Z direction.
- “AC-2D PhCj 1001 and planar multilayer film 1003 are both multilayer films, and each layer is continuous with each other.
- Periodic structures with different PTV sums include periodic structures with different P r C lengths, different P r C directions, or different dimensions.
- the effect of the twentieth invention is that, as described above, the sum of PTV is different so that the planar multilayer film 1003 has the effect of confining light propagating in the thin film surface of AC-2D PhCj 1001. Light can be transferred (transmitted and reflected) at a constant rate between the two periodic structures, and the rate can be controlled by the length and direction of the PTV.
- 1003 by placing appropriate 3D self-cloning photonic crystals around the AC-2DPhC 1001, the output beams 1011 to 1012 in Fig. 10 can be suppressed.
- the twenty-first invention can be explained by a combination of “AC-2DPhC” 1401 shown in FIG. 15 and the surrounding air or quartz substrate 1402. The atmosphere is a uniform medium of n 1.0. H-type propagation (C) and (E) are manifested in combination with the surrounding atmosphere and the quartz substrate 1402. Further, if the cleaved end portion in FIG. 12 is coated with metal, the output beam 121 1 can be suppressed.
- the thin films may be alternately stacked while the uneven shape of the region 123 is maintained.
- the periodic structure In order to develop the H-type propagation, it is preferable to prepare the periodic structure according to any one of the first to fifteenth inventions in a large area. It is desirable to use -PhC. In fact, in the AC-PhC having the structure shown in FIG. 1, in general, the average incident direction of deposition or etching particles is inclined with respect to the substrate. It is possible to prepare a periodic structure of the invention with a large area. A specific manufacturing method will be described below with reference to the drawings.
- FIG. 17 shows the direction of the substrate and the deposited or etched particles incident on the substrate. It is a front view.
- Reference numeral 1701 denotes a convex portion formed on the substrate
- reference numeral 1702 denotes a concave portion formed on the substrate
- reference numeral 1703 denotes an average incident direction of deposited particles or etching particles.
- Reference numerals 1704 and 1705 denote vertices of the convex portions.
- FIG. 18 is a top view showing the substrate and the direction of deposited particles or etching particles incident on the substrate.
- Reference numeral 1801 denotes the upper surface of the substrate
- reference numeral 1802 denotes the average incident direction of the deposited particles or etching particles
- reference numeral 1803 denotes the direction of the period of the irregularities formed on the substrate.
- FIG. 19 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the target and the substrate.
- Reference numeral 1901 indicates a target
- reference numeral 1902 indicates a substrate
- reference numeral 1903 indicates the direction of the period of the irregularities formed on the substrate
- reference numeral 1904 indicates the average incident direction of the deposited particles, etching particles, or etching particles.
- FIG. 20 is a front view and a side view showing the positional relationship between the target and the substrate and the incident direction of the deposited particles, etching particles, or etching particles.
- Fig. 20 (a) is a front view and Fig. 20 (b) is a side view.
- the twenty-second invention can be explained by the incident directions of the substrate and deposited particles or etching particles with respect to the substrate shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, for example.
- the deposited particles or etching particles are averaged in the incident direction on the substrate with irregular or sawtooth two-dimensional or one-dimensional period as shown in Fig. 17.
- Manufactured with a film formation process in which values are concentrated in a specific direction (anisotropic deposition or anisotropic etching), and the average incident direction 1703 of the incident angle of deposited particles or etched particles with respect to the substrate is oblique to the substrate. It is desirable to have it. Further, as shown in FIG.
- the angle formed by the period 1803 of the unevenness formed on the substrate 1801 and the average incident direction 1802 of the deposited particles or etching particles is between 0 ° and 45 °, preferably 0 ° to 10 °, Most preferably, it is 0 degree.
- the angle is 0 degree, the angle between the second PT V202 in Fig. 2 and the XY plane (including the first and third PTV) is minimized, and the degree of symmetry breaking is maximum. It becomes.
- Figs. 19 and 20 The simplest method for a two-dimensional periodic structure is shown in Figs. 19 and 20.
- the substrate is placed off the axis of the target (displaced from directly above), and the direction of the period 1903 formed on the substrate and the direction connecting the center of the cylindrical target 1901 and the center of gravity of the substrate are parallel to each other It is to arrange so that the sputtering method is used.
- the deposition particles that jump out of the target have directionality (the direction in which the particles fly is not random), and the deposition particles scattered off the axis of the target have directivity in the direction of the average incident direction 1904.
- more particles are accumulated at the vertex 1705 of the convex portion than at the vertex 1704 of the convex portion, resulting in the AC-2DPhC shown in FIG.
- a substrate with an in-plane pattern with a two-dimensional period of a square lattice as described in Fig. 3 (b) on page 231 is arranged, and the direction of the period formed on the substrate and the deposited particles or etching It is convenient to arrange the particles so that the average incident directions are about 45 degrees. On the other hand, in order to obtain a desired propagation direction, it is possible to use an angle formed by the direction of the period formed on the substrate and the average incident direction of the deposited particles or the etching particles.
- the angle formed by one of the average incident direction of deposited particles or etched particles and the period of irregularities is 0 degrees, and the average incident direction of deposited particles or etched particles and the period of irregularities If the other angle (with period 2) is 90 degrees, the propagation of H-type propagation (A) and (E) occurs only in the direction of period 1. If the angle between the average incident direction of deposited particles or etched particles and the period 1 is 45 degrees, the propagation of H-type propagation (A) and (E) occurs in the direction of the period 1 and period 2.
- the ratio of the intensity of the H-type propagation (E) light generated in the direction of period 1 and the intensity of the H-type propagation (E) light generated in the direction of period 2 can be adjusted by the angle value.
- the deposition particles have directivity in the direction perpendicular to the substrate, and the etching particles are incident obliquely with respect to the substrate (having directivity in a direction not perpendicular to the substrate).
- the periodic structure described in 1 can be produced.
- a manufacturing method of two-dimensional P h C using P r C shown in FIG. This can be achieved by depositing a film by a self-cloning method on a substrate having irregularities such as a distorted diffraction grating.
- a method for manufacturing a substrate having irregularities such as a blazed diffraction grating, it is effective to perform sputter deposition under conditions suitable for a step-type blazed diffraction grating.
- the positional relationship between the target and the substrate may be directly above.
- a substrate having a cross-sectional shape such as a blazed diffraction grating can also be produced by nanoimprinting.
- the first to fifteenth inventions do not exhibit their functions without a separate electromagnetic wave source (light source).
- the 11th to 14th inventions have polarization dependency due to the breaking of symmetry, it is effective to separately use them in combination with a polarization separation element, a polarizer, or a phase plate.
- it is effective to combine it with a reflection means such as a lens or a metal mirror, which is a conventional device for controlling the propagation of light.
- the number of beams can be increased to the number of equations.
- a plurality of parallel beams and lenses generated as a result of H-shaped propagation are combined, a plurality of beams generated from the same light source can be condensed at one point.
- An optical recording device can be obtained by arranging a photoconductor at this condensed point.
- the beams traveling parallel to each other generated by the H-type propagation (E) have almost the same polarization state, but the polarization extinction ratio is deteriorated, so that the polarizer, the reflective polarization separation element, and the walk-off It is desirable to recover the polarization extinction ratio in combination with a type polarization separation element.
- the intensity of the beam can be dispersed and made substantially uniform within the effective range of the optical elements.
- the same effect can also be obtained by combining the periodic structure that generates the H-shaped propagation, which is branched into a plurality of beams propagating in the same direction, and a reflective polarizer, a mirror, a wave plate, and the like. it can. Note that there may be a plurality of beams incident from the outside first.
- the twenty-fifth invention is effective as an optical recording apparatus, for example.
- the device may include a charge coupled device array light receiver, a CMOS sensor array, or reflecting means having the same reflection direction as the periodic structure.
- the periodic structure splits incident light into two or more beams propagating in the same direction, and at least one of the two or more beams transmits or reflects the spatial light modulator,
- a device in which at least two beams including the beam transmitted or reflected from the spatial light modulator among the two or more beams are condensed at the same location in the photosensitive member via the lens is effective as an optical recording apparatus. It is.
- the two beams can be accurately focused at one point (however, the spread of the spot is ignored) ) Furthermore, if two-dimensional intensity distribution change is given to one or both of the two beams, it can be used for holographic recording.
- the coupling efficiency between the antisymmetric mode of P h C and the external plane wave depends on the incident angle.
- the coupling efficiency between the antisymmetric mode of P h C and the external plane wave depends on the number of layers (number of periods).
- 3D-collapse ACBC and the periodic structure by "3D-collapse ACBC” is "3D-collapse ACPC” Pr C and BAS and equivalent P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 16 are referred to as “2D-inside-down ACBCj” and the “2D-inside-down ACBC” periodic structure is referred to as “2D-inside-down ACPC”.
- 3D-collapse ACBC Pr C and BAS and equivalent P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 16 are referred to as “2D-inside-down ACBCj” and the “2D-inside-down ACBC” periodic structure is referred to as “2D-inside-down ACPC”.
- FIG. 1 A manufacturing method of “2D-collapse ACPC” shown in FIG. 1 will be described.
- the structure shown in FIG. 1 is manufactured by first forming irregularities on the substrate base material, then forming a shaping layer on the substrate, and then laminating a multilayer film in accordance with the self-cloning method and the twenty-second invention. it can.
- FIG. 21 is a schematic perspective view showing the substrate 124 shown in FIG.
- Reference numeral 2101 denotes a substrate base material
- reference numeral 2102 denotes a concave-convex convex portion formed on the substrate base material.
- the periodicity of the irregularities formed on the substrate base material has only in the X direction and is uniform in the Y direction.
- a fused silica is used as the material of the substrate 124, and an electron beam is placed on the flat fused quartz substrate.
- EB 410nm period in lithography process and dry etching by exposure
- a rectangular irregularity (hereinafter referred to as a substrate pattern) having a convex part (projection part height and width of 205 nm) is formed.
- a process that combines lithography and etching by EB a process that combines lithography and etching by light or X-ray exposure, or a nano-imprinting method can be used.
- an opaque material film is used in a UV layer that is sufficiently thick and laminated on a substrate that is opaque in the UV region or a transparent substrate, unevenness on the substrate can be produced even in a process that combines interference exposure and etching. Can be formed.
- FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the substrate 124 and the shaping layer 112 shown in FIG.
- Reference numeral 2201 represents the substrate shown in FIG. 21, and reference numeral 2202 represents the shaping layer (same as the intermediate layer 112).
- the periodicity is only in the X direction.
- the substrate is removed from right above the target, and the radial direction of the target and the periodic direction of the substrate are made substantially the same direction, so that the cross section in the ZX plane is a non-isosceles triangle. (Triangles with different lengths on three sides)
- a shaped shaping layer can be realized.
- FIG. 1 a multilayer film composed of the Si 0 2 layers 101 to 11 1 and the Nb 2 0 5 layers 113 to 123 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.
- Nb 2 0 5 and S i 0 2 are alternately laminated on the substrate on which the shaping layer 2202 shown in FIG. 22 is laminated, the cross-sectional shape shown in FIG. 1 is obtained.
- S i 0 2 layer and Nb 2 0 5 layer are stacked by rf bias sputtering.
- Figure 23 is an electron microscope of the cross section in the ZX plane of the 2D self-cloning P h C (2D-collapsed ACPC) actually fabricated. It is a photograph. The stacking cycle is 11 cycles.
- the layer with the appearance close to white is Nb 2 0 5 layer
- the layer with the appearance close to black is S i 0 2 layer
- the substrate and the shaping layer are indistinguishable because they are made of the same composition material.
- Fig. 23 it can be seen that the growth direction of the film is inclined by about 4 degrees.
- the shape is not stable up to the initial third layer of the multilayer film, and the shape is stabilized from the fourth layer, but there is no problem.
- the direction of film growth is the direction of the third PTV, and the direction in which the third PTV is projected onto the XY plane in Fig. 1 is the direction in which the propagation or branching of light from H-type propagation (A) to (E) occurs. Become.
- the target is, for example, an Nb 2 5 sintered body
- the deposition gas is, for example, a mixed gas of argon and oxygen
- the gas pressure is, for example, 0.3 Pa to 1.
- the oxygen gas flow rate ratio is, for example, about 10% ( It is preferably 5% or more and 20% or less, and more preferably 7% or more and 15% or less under conditions that balance the film formation rate (the amount of increase in film thickness per hour) and the stability of the composition.
- the target is, for example, quartz
- the deposition gas is, for example, a mixed gas of argon and oxygen
- the gas pressure is, for example, 0.33 to 2.03 (preferably 0 6 Pa to 1.8 Pa, and more preferably 0.8 Pa to 1.5 Pa, which is a condition that balances the residence stress and density of the film.
- the bias to be applied is preferably about several tens of volts, although the optimum value depends on other film formation conditions and the apparatus.
- the substrate heating temperature in the thin film process is usually desirably 0.3 times or more of the melting point of the medium, but is preferably 0.3 to 0.5 times, more preferably the film density and heating cooling. The balance of the time required for this is 0.31 times or more and 0.4 times or less. In this embodiment, the substrate heating temperature is preferably about 600K.
- rf bias sputtering method ECR sputtering method, rf magnetron sputtering that does not apply bias on a substrate shaped into a pillar type, and sputtering, ion gun, RIE, and other etching combinations can also be used for 2D-transverse. Breaking ACPC can be made.
- the growth direction of the film depends on the radial direction of the target. It can be controlled by changing the angle between the periodic directions of the plate, and it can also be controlled by the distance between the target and the substrate.
- “3D-collapse ACPC” can control the direction of PTV by adjusting the angle between the average incident direction 1802 of etching particles in FIG. 18 and the period 1803 of irregularities between 0 degrees and 90 degrees, for example. .
- Nb 2 0 5 was used as a high refractive index medium in P h C, but SiC, Si Ox (where 0 ⁇ x ⁇ 2), tantalum pentoxide (Ta 2 0 5 ), titanium dioxide (Ti0 2 ), gallium nitride (GaN), aluminum nitride (AIN), zinc oxide (ZnO), ZnSe, ITO (Indium Thin Oxide), hafnium oxide (Hf0 2 ), a-Si0, SiN, etc. It is also effective to use a combination of any of n ⁇ 2. It is also effective to use a combination of n ⁇ 1.6 media such as magnesium fluoride (MgF) and calcium fluoride (CaF) as the low refractive index medium.
- MgF magnesium fluoride
- CaF calcium fluoride
- FIG. 24 is a graph showing the transmittance wavelength dependency of the periodic structure formed on the substrate shown in FIG. 1 when the beam transmitted according to Snell's law is perpendicularly incident.
- Figure 24 (a) shows the corresponding characteristics when the incident beam is TE polarized
- Figure 24 (b) shows the characteristics when the incident beam is TM polarized.
- the periodic structure shown in Fig. 1 (and Fig. 23) has a transmittance wavelength dependency different from that of conventional optical elements such as diffraction gratings and wavelength selective filters. I understand.
- the present embodiment uses an H-type propagation (E) to install an optical fiber with a lens at, for example, an incident position of light and an outgoing position of branched light, thereby providing an optical branching device used for optical communication. Available as (star power bra).
- E H-type propagation
- a three-beam pickup for tracking and reading / writing can be easily realized and used for optical recording devices.
- a beam having a wide spectrum is incident from the z direction with respect to this embodiment, it can be used as a wavelength branching mechanism, for example, as a spectroscope.
- the periodic structure that generates the H-shaped propagation (E) is used and the same number of lenses as the beam are used, it corresponds to a plurality of types of optical recording disks that use the same wavelength.
- One pickup can be realized.
- Embodiment 2 of the present invention A holographic optical recording apparatus according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
- This embodiment is a holographic optical recording apparatus using H-type propagation.
- FIG. 25 is a side view showing the basic configuration of the holographic recording apparatus.
- the holographic recording device is composed of a laser light source 2501, a lens 2502, a periodic structure 2503 having an optical branching function by H-type propagation (E), and a spatial light modulator integrated adjacent to each other DMD2504 (digital micromirror device) ), A mirror 2505, a reflective polarization separation element 2506, a 1Z4 wavelength plate 2507, a lens 2508, a recording medium 2509, and a two-dimensional image sensor (CMOS sensor).
- HBS devices with optical branching function by H-type propagation (E) to H-type propagation (K) are abbreviated as “HBS”.
- FIG. 26 is a side view showing the operation during recording.
- Reference numeral 2601 is an incident parallel beam to H BS2503
- reference numerals 2602 and 2603 are output beams output from the transmission side of HBS2503
- reference numeral 2604 is a beam reflected by a mirror
- reference numeral 2605 is a beam reflected by DMD2504
- reference numeral Reference numerals 2606 and 2607 respectively denote output beams output from the HBS 2503 to the reflection side.
- each beam is a common lens Condensed light at the focal point and recorded in the form of interference fringes on a recording medium made of a photosensitive material.
- FIG. 27 is a side view showing the operation during reproduction.
- Reference numeral 2701 is an incident parallel beam to the HBS 2503
- reference numerals 2702 and 2703 are output beams output from the HBS 2503 to the transmission side
- reference numeral 2704 is a beam reflected by a mirror
- reference numeral 2705 is a beam reflected by a recording medium 2509.
- Reference numerals 2706 denote beams reflected by the reflective polarization separation element 2506, respectively.
- a parallel beam output from a laser light source with a lens is incident on H B S and then output as two beams propagating in parallel from the transmission side. After that, all the pixels are turned off by D M D, one of the two beams is blocked, and the other beam is reflected by a mirror made of a dielectric multilayer film formed on the same substrate as D M D.
- the reflected beam passes through the reflective polarization separation element and the 1 Z 4 wavelength plate, and is then focused at the focal position by the lens, and intensity distribution information is given in the form of interference fringes on the recording medium.
- the beam to which the information is applied and reflected from the recording medium is reflected by the reflective polarization separation element and enters the two-dimensional image sensor.
- Signal processing and the like may be the same as those of conventional holographic recording.
- the DMD is turned off during playback.
- the DMD reflected light and the mirror-reflected light are incident sufficiently far away from the two-dimensional image sensor, so there is no adverse effect on playback.
- it may be deteriorated because it may deteriorate the photosensitive material of the recording medium.
- FIG. 28 is a diagram showing H B S used in this example.
- the first region 2801 and the third region 2803 in the HBS are self-cloning 3D Ph C “3D-collapse ACPC”, and the periodic structure of a square lattice with an uneven period on the XY plane of 180 nm Have.
- the second region 2802 is “2D-collapse A CPC” in which the period of unevenness of the substrate fabricated in the same manner as in FIG. 1 is 205 nm.
- the fourth region 2804 is a one-dimensional periodic structure.
- Reference numeral 2805 denotes the incident and outgoing positions of the beam
- reference numeral 2806 denotes the outgoing position of the beam.
- the HBS 2503 will be described with reference to FIG.
- the first area 2801 in HBS 2503 is It is a self-cloning 3D P h C, and has a square lattice-like periodic structure with an irregular period of 180 nm on the XY plane.
- the second region 2802 is “2D-collapsed ACPC” in which the period of unevenness of the substrate manufactured in the same manner as in Example 1 is 205 nm.
- the third area 2803 is the same as the first area 2801.
- the fourth region 2804 is a one-dimensional multilayer film having no period in the XY direction.
- the first region 2801 has a band gap at a wavelength of 405 nm, and suppresses leakage light from the second region 2802 in the Y direction.
- the size of the second region 2802 is 4 mm so that two beams are emitted.
- the beam emitted to the reflection side can be used for monitoring a laser light source.
- the second area 2802 may be “2D-inverted ACPC”.
- the present embodiment is an apparatus that performs uniform light intensity distribution and polarization conversion using H-type propagation.
- the apparatus according to the present embodiment is particularly suitable for use in making the light intensity uniform in a projection display (projector) and in polarization conversion from a non-polarized light source.
- the optical integrator (opt i cal ntegrator.
- Op l is used to effectively apply the luminous flux having a circular cross section from the lamp or the reflector attached to the lamp to the rectangular liquid crystal panel. It has been.
- Examples of Op l include the examples described in Patent Document 4 and Patent Document 5.
- This example uses a periodic structure showing H-type propagation, and has a simple and compact configuration.
- This is a polarization-compensated Opl (hereinafter abbreviated as rPC-0pl) that equalizes the intensity and converts the polarization and concentrates the output light in one direction.
- rPC-0pl polarization-compensated Opl
- FIG. 29 is a side view of PC-0pl and a diagram showing light propagation inside PC-0pl.
- PC-0pl shown in FIG. 29 has an optical fiber 2901 with a lens, a mirror 2902, a 1Z4 wavelength plate 2903, an HBS group 2904 to 2907, a PhC reflection type polarization separation element 2908, and a light shielding plate 2909.
- Reference numeral 2910 represents a parallel beam output from the optical fiber with lens / 2901.
- HBS groups 2904 to 2907 arranged in series with respect to the traveling direction of the beam from the optical fiber 2901 with a lens, a reflective polarization separation element 2908 with a two-dimensional Ph C, and a mirror 2902 with respect to a parallel beam 2910 3
- the distance between HB S2904 and mirror 2902 is 20mm.
- the output light 2910 from the optical fiber 2901 with a lens is incident on the HBS 2904 via the 1Z4 wavelength plate 2903, branched into three beams on the transmission side, and output.
- the three beams output to the transmission side of HBS 2904 are incident on the next H B S 2905, and the beams are split into nine beams on the transmission side and output.
- the number of beams output to the transmission side increases as the latter HBS is reached.
- the output light 2910 from the optical fiber 2901 with a lens enters the HB S2904 via the 1Z4 wavelength plate 2903, and is branched into three beams on the reflection side and output.
- the three beams output to the reflection side of the HBS2904 pass through the 1 Z4 wave plate 2903, are reflected by the mirror, pass through the 1 Z4 wave plate again, and enter the HBS 2904 again.
- the light is incident on HBS 2904 again, and the beam is split into 9 beams on the transmission side and output.
- the actual number of beams is five.
- the position where the light is incident again on the HBS2904 and the beam is split into nine beams on the transmission side and output is as follows.
- the beam incident on the HBS2904 again is divided into nine beams on the reflection side (actually five beams due to beam overlap) and output. [0186] In this way, the number of beams increases with each repetition of transmission and multiple reflection between HBS, reflection type polarization separation element 2908, and mirror 2902 (such as, for example, a chain reaction in fission). .
- the reflective polarization separation element 2908 between the HBS, and between the HBS mirrors
- the light that has passed through the reflective polarization separation element 290 8 is a large number of beams.
- the intensity distribution with the overlap is linearly polarized light.
- the mirror 2902, the HBS 2904 to 2907, and the reflective polarization separation element 2908 are arranged in parallel, and the incident light is a parallel beam, the light transmitted through the reflective polarization separation element 2908 is so-called telecentric light. It becomes. Furthermore, if a large number of optical fibers with lenses are installed, almost uniform light can be obtained in a larger area. Further, the light shielding plate 2909 can block light having low uniformity in the outer peripheral portion of the light transmitted through the reflective polarization separation element 2908.
- the H B S group will be described.
- “2D-collapsing ACPC” in the H B S group has 45 degrees of light splitting direction, and each has a beam separation function of 2 mm.
- a one-dimensional planar multilayer film that blocks in-plane propagation is placed around “2D-collapse ACPC”.
- it is effective to use a three-dimensional periodic structure or a metal film instead of a one-dimensional planar multilayer film, although this increases production costs.
- the manufacturing cost also increases, the uniformity of output light in FIG. 29 improves as the number of H B S increases.
- the optical fiber with lens 2901 is connected to a green laser light source, and the beam diameter of the output beam is 1 mm.
- the reflective polarization separation element 2908 has a function of selecting the final output light as linearly polarized light having a predetermined direction, and the polarization component orthogonal to the polarization direction of the output light included in the incident light to the polarization separation element is reflected. It is incident on the HBS again.
- the reason why the two-dimensional PhC is used as the reflection type polarization separation element is that the transmittance and the reflectance can be set arbitrarily.
- the transmittance in the direction of the transmission polarization is about 40% (preferably 20% or more and 60% Or less, more preferably 30% or more and 50% or less). The degree distribution can be made uniform.
- Mira 1902 is made of a dielectric multilayer film, and the multilayer film is removed only at the light incident position from the optical fiber with lens / 2901, reflecting the return light of the periodic structure having the optical branching function.
- a mirror with an aluminum film attached on a transparent glass plate can be used, it is a flat mirror, and a dielectric multilayer film is more suitable because it does not absorb light.
- the 1 Z 4 wavelength plate 2903 has a function to change the polarization state.
- the light reflected by the reflective polarization separation element 2908 is transmitted through the 1 Z 4 wavelength plate 2 903, reflected by the mirror 2902, and again 1 Z 4
- the light that has passed through the wave plate 2903 passes through the reflective polarization separation element 2908 at a high rate.
- the intensity distribution is made uniform by repeating the branching and reflection of the beam, and the output light is linearly polarized. Furthermore, since the reflecting element arranged in parallel with the parallel beam and a periodic structure having a light branching function for branching the incident light into a plurality of beams propagating in parallel, the output light has a number of parallel beams propagating in the same direction. The intensity distribution is maintained even in the distance after the light is transmitted. In general, the LD light source has high coherence, and speckles occur when used as illumination. However, the light output from PC-0pl shown in Fig. 29 is a set of many beams with different optical paths, and the coherence is It has been eased.
- a polarizing element such as a 1 Z 2 wavelength plate, a birefringence crystal walk-off polarization separating element, or a depolarizer may be inserted between the mirror 2902 and the reflective polarization separating element 2908. It is also effective to use a laser diode (L D) or LED as the light source.
- L D laser diode
- a light absorber and a photoelectric conversion device according to Example 4 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
- the present embodiment is a light absorber and photoelectric conversion device using H-type propagation.
- a general photoelectric conversion device uses the photovoltaic effect of a semiconductor (separated into electrons and holes when the semiconductor absorbs light) as its basic operation principle (non-patent document) (See item 7).
- a photoelectric conversion device using a semiconductor extracts a carrier by using a semiconductor junction.
- Semiconductor light absorption processes are broadly divided into interband absorption, band-localized level absorption, localized level-level absorption, and intraband absorption. An area is generated. Localized interlevel absorption and in-band absorption are not involved in free carrier generation, and absorbed photon energy is converted into thermal energy.
- FIG. 30 is a schematic side view of a photoelectric conversion device based on “2D-collapsed ACPC” consisting of amorphous SiC (hereinafter “aS i C”) and thin-film polycrystalline silicon (hereinafter “rcSi”). It is.
- the photoelectric conversion device comprises a glass substrate and a glass substrate on which a Si 0 2 barrier layer (not shown), a back electrode 3001 that also serves as a mirror, and a transparent conductive film (TCO) made of ITO.
- TCO transparent conductive film
- 3002D-collapsed ACPC 3003, transparent conductive film 3004, electrodes 3005 and 3006, and SiO 2 layer 3007.
- Basic structure Pi-nZp-i-nZ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Zp-in two-terminal connection stack type.
- the light absorptivity derived from the electron band structure is compensated by controlling the photon band structure and the light propagation direction.
- Figure 31 shows the PrC and BAS of "2D-collapse ACPC" 3003 shown in Figure 30.
- FIG. 31 (a) is P r C
- the length of the first PT V3101 parallel to the X direction is 350 nm
- the length of the second PTV3102 is 161 nm
- the third P TV is uniform in the ⁇ direction, and the length cannot be uniquely defined (optional).
- Reference numerals 3103 to 3106 denote lattice points.
- Fig. 31 (b) is a BAS, parallel to the plane containing the first PT V3101 and the second PT V3102 (here parallel to the ZX plane) and including the midpoint of the third P TV It is sectional drawing by a surface.
- the BAS in Fig. 31 (b) consists of regions 3107 and 3108 occupied by i-type // c-Si, region 3109 occupied by n-type // cSi, and region 3110 occupied by
- the region 3107 and the region 3108 are continuous as a periodic structure. The same applies to the regions 3110, 3111 and 3112.
- the regions 3107 and 3108 and the region 3109 can be regarded as one body.
- the thickness of the i-type // c-Si layer is about 100nm
- the thickness of the n-type // c-Si layer is about 10 nm
- the thickness of the p-type a-SiC layer is about 50 nm.
- // c-Si is E g1 ⁇ 21.1 eV n 1 ⁇ 23.4 (at a wavelength longer than the absorption edge).
- the “c-Si” layer is divided into a non-doped layer and an n-type semiconductor layer, but the refractive index is the same, and can be regarded as one when considering the behavior of photons as P h C.
- the thickness of the aS i: H layer can be 100 nm or less, so photoelectric conversion with P h C
- the advantages large bottom absorption on the longer wavelength side than the absorption edge, large band gap energy, etc.
- materials that satisfy n ⁇ 3 in the transparent wavelength band include semiconductors such as Si, Ge, SiGe, gallium arsenide, and aluminum gallium arsenide compounds.
- the window layer (a layer that does not absorb photon and has electrical conductivity) will be described.
- A-SiC is a wide-bandgap semiconductor and has a solar spectrum. Light absorption in the region is small and suitable for use as a window layer in a photoelectric conversion device for sunlight, but a-SiO can be used instead of a-SiC (see Non-Patent Document 7).
- the white plate glass 5 mm thick flat plate forming a barrier layer of Si0 2, to form a metal electrode thereon. Furthermore, about 500 nm of ITO is laminated on it by sputtering. Next, patterning is performed on the I TO layer using a photosensitive resist film and mask exposure, and a relief type unevenness is formed by etching. After that, a triangular shaped layer of ITO is laminated by bias sputtering. Next, the following steps (1) to (3) are repeated for one cycle or more.
- n-Si 10 nm of a-Si is deposited by sputter deposition, polycrystallized by annealing with an excimer laser, and then doped with impurities by ion implantation and lamp annealing to form n-type // C- Si is formed.
- impurity doping to the n layer can be performed by using argon, hydrogen, PH 3 mixed gas at the time of film formation by rf sputtering, or a target to which the impurity is added can be used.
- A-SiC is formed according to the self-cloning method described above.
- “A-SiC” is formed by rf bias sputtering of a SiC target with argon and C 2 H 2 .
- Another method can be obtained by rf sputtering of Si target with argon and C 2 H 2 (reactive sputtering).
- SiC is doped with aluminum as an impurity to make a p-type semiconductor.
- an ITO layer is formed by bias sputtering under the condition for filling the irregularities (increasing the bias amount).
- the structure shown in FIG. 30 is completed by forming a comb-shaped metal electrode on this ITO layer. Further, it is also effective to form a Si 0 2 film as an antireflection layer by an arbitrary film forming method.
- a “2D-collapsed ACPC” layer is formed by rf sputtering. This can also be realized by a combination of a sputtering method, a CVD method and etching.
- one of the // cSi layers in this example is thinner than the film thickness (100 m or more) of a thin film multilayer solar cell using normal // cSi at 100 nm, but the light is // cS. It is desirable that light absorption be performed near the junction because the generation of electron-hole pairs is particularly strongly absorbed near the surface of i, and the electron-hole pairs are separated and moved to the junction. As shown in the example, the thinness of one // cSi layer is advantageous for higher efficiency. In this embodiment, “2D-collapse ACPC” is used. However, if “3D-collapse ACPC” is used, light can be efficiently absorbed in a wider wavelength band.
- P r C and BAS in the P h C part will be supplemented.
- the high refractive index portion is P-type aS H, i-type aS H, a multilayer film by n-type aS H, be a low refractive index portion is Sn0 2 of P r C and BAS, the photonic band structure is almost identical As shown in FIG. 30, an excellent photoelectric conversion device can be realized because electrical connection is made.
- Non-Patent Document 7 Prismatic force If the refractive index of the bar is small, light leaking from the periodic structure 3003 to the prismatic cover is sufficiently small.
- Example 16 of the present invention A periodic structure using a fluid in part according to Example 16 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
- This example is a periodic structure corresponding to the first to tenth inventions other than AC-PhC.
- FIG. 32 is T i 0 2, Sn0 2, Ru sectional view der 3D P h C prepared by using iodine solution.
- Reference numeral 3201 represents T i 0 2
- reference numeral 3202 represents Sn0 2
- reference numeral 3203 represents an iodine solution
- reference numeral 3204 represents a substrate.
- the PTV of the periodic structure is in the direction inclined by 86 degrees with respect to the X, Y, and XY planes.
- a feature of the present embodiment is that a fluid is used as one of the media, and the fluid can be exchanged with the outside.
- liquid optical devices include wet solar cells, but if an electrolyte, especially iodine solution, is used as the liquid and an electrode is connected to the outside, the periodic structure shown in Fig. 32 is also used as a wet color solar cell. Operate. The manufacturing how, Sn0 after forming the 2 and T i 0 2 of the multilayer film to form a Luke or grooves drilled capable of injecting a fluid (see Patent Document 6).
- one of the media is a fluid as in this embodiment, there are advantages that the propagation characteristics can be made variable and that a chemical reaction can be generated inside the periodic structure. Will be described. Also in this embodiment, light incident from the Z direction propagates in the X direction within the periodic structure. Propagation in the X direction is equivalent to confining light in the periodic structure, resulting in a wet solar cell with high conversion efficiency. Industrial applicability
- the present invention can be suitably used in the field of optical operations such as optical branching, spectroscopy, and optical recording.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Nonlinear Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Nanotechnology (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
- Diffracting Gratings Or Hologram Optical Elements (AREA)
- Optical Integrated Circuits (AREA)
Abstract
Description
明 細 書 Specification
周期構造体及び周期構造の作製方法並びに応用製品 Periodic structure, method for producing periodic structure, and applied product
技術分野 Technical field
[0001] 本発明は光波長程度の周期を有する周期構造体及びその製造方法に関する TECHNICAL FIELD [0001] The present invention relates to a periodic structure having a period of about the optical wavelength and a method for manufacturing the same.
。 また、 該周期構造体を用いた電磁波、 特に光の伝搬の制御方法及び応用製 品に関する。 . The present invention also relates to a method for controlling propagation of electromagnetic waves, particularly light using the periodic structure, and applied products.
背景技術 Background art
[0002] 近年フォトニック結晶 (Photonic Crystal、 以下 「P h C」 と略記する) と呼ばれる 2種類以上の媒質からなる電磁波の波長程度の周期をもつ 2次元 又は 3次元の周期構造体 (periodical structure) が電磁波の伝搬を制御す るものとして注目を集めている。 [0002] In recent years, a two-dimensional or three-dimensional periodic structure having a period of about the wavelength of an electromagnetic wave composed of two or more types of media called Photonic Crystal (hereinafter abbreviated as “P h C”). ) Is attracting attention as a means of controlling the propagation of electromagnetic waves.
[0003] P h Cの基本となるフォトニックバンドの概念は非特許文献 1により発表 され、 その後様々な興味深い性質が提示されたことにより注目を集めた。 [0003] The concept of the photonic band, which is the basis of P h C, was published by Non-Patent Document 1, and attracted attention since various interesting properties were presented.
[0004] なお、 既に知られる主要な構造、 現象、 解析手法及び応用事例については 非特許文献 2や非特許文献 3の第 78〜第 137頁にまとめられている。 [0004] Major structures, phenomena, analysis methods, and application examples that are already known are summarized on pages 78 to 137 of Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3.
[0005] また非特許文献 4および非特許文献 5では、 自己クローニング型 P h C ( 以下、 「AC-PhC」 と略記する) の反対称モード (奇対称モード) と外部平面 波の結合について説明されている。 [0005] Non-Patent Document 4 and Non-Patent Document 5 explain the coupling between the anti-symmetric mode (odd symmetric mode) of self-cloning P h C (hereinafter abbreviated as “AC-PhC”) and external plane waves. Has been.
[0006] 特許文献 1 :特開 2001 -091701号公報 [0006] Patent Document 1: JP 2001-091701 A
特許文献 2:特開 2004-279713号公報 Patent Document 2: JP 2004-279713 A
特許文献 3:特開平 9-146064号公報 Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-146064
特許文献 4:特開平 3-111806号公報 Patent Document 4: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 3-111806
特許文献 5:米国特許第 3631288号公報 Patent Document 5: US Patent No. 3631288
特許文献 6:米国特許第 5172267号公報 Patent Document 6: US Patent No. 5172267
[0007] 非特許文献 1 : Ohtaka, PHYSICAL REVIEW B, Vol.19, No.10, pp.5057-5067,[0007] Non-Patent Document 1: Ohtaka, PHYSICAL REVIEW B, Vol.19, No.10, pp.5057-5067,
15 May 1979 15 May 1979
非特許文献 2 :川上彰ニ郎 監修, " フォトニック結晶技術とその応用" , 株 式会社シーエムシー出版, 2002 Non-Patent Document 2: Supervised by Akihiro Kawakami, "Photonic crystal technology and its applications" Shimushi Publishing Co., Ltd., 2002
非特許文献 3:平成 15年度特許出願技術動向調査報告書 光集積回路, 平成 16 年 3月, 特許庁 Non-patent document 3: FY2003 Patent Application Technology Trend Survey Optical Integrated Circuit, March 2004, Japan Patent Office
非特許文献 4 :本間洋 他, " フォトニック結晶の反対称モードと外部平面波 の結合" , 2004年秋季第 65回応用物理学会学術講演会, 2004年 9月 Non-Patent Document 4: Hiroshi Honma et al., "Coupling of anti-symmetric modes and external plane waves in photonic crystals", 2004 Fall 65th JSAP Conference on Applied Physics, September 2004
非特許文献 5 :本間洋 他, " フォトニック結晶の反対称モードを用いた光減 衰器" , 電子情報通信学会ソサイエティ大会, 2004年 9月 Non-Patent Document 5: Hiroshi Honma et al., "Optical attenuator using antisymmetric mode of photonic crystal", Society Conference of IEICE, September 2004
非特許文献 6 :川嶋貴之 他, " 2次元フォトニック結晶偏光分離素子の作製 とその高性能化" , 電子情報通信学会光エレクトロニクス研究会, 0PE99-109 Non-Patent Document 6: Takayuki Kawashima et al., "Fabrication of 2-D Photonic Crystal Polarization Separation Element and Its High Performance", IEICE Technical Committee on Optical Electronics, 0PE99-109
, 1999年 12月 , December 1999
非特許文献 7 :濱川圭弘 編著, " 太陽光発電 最新の技術とシステム" , 株 式会社シーエムシー, 2000 Non-Patent Document 7: Edited by Yasuhiro Ayukawa, "Latest Solar Power Generation Technology and System", CMC Corporation, 2000
発明の開示 Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題 Problems to be solved by the invention
[0008] 上述する状況において、 従来困難であった光の伝搬形態、 その伝搬形態を 実現する素子、 素子の製造方法、 および素子の利用形態を提供することが望 まれている。 In the situation described above, it is desired to provide a light propagation form, an element that realizes the propagation form, a method for manufacturing the element, and a use form of the element, which have been difficult in the past.
[0009] 薄膜光学素子中の任意の位置に対して、 任意の入射角 (または広い入射角 度範囲) で平面波を入射した場合に、 光学素子の面内 (薄膜内) に高効率で 光を伝搬させることは不可能であった。 例えば光導波路ゃゥッドのァノマリ 一 (Wood' s Anoma l y) のように回折格子を用いた外部平面波の結合の例があ るが、 薄膜光学素子中の任意の位置に対して、 面に対して任意に近い広い角 度範囲で平面波を入射した場合に、 光学素子の面内 (薄膜内) に高効率で光 を伝搬するわけではない。 [0009] When a plane wave is incident on an arbitrary position in the thin film optical element at an arbitrary incident angle (or a wide incident angle range), light is efficiently emitted in the plane of the optical element (in the thin film). It was impossible to propagate. For example, there is an example of coupling of an external plane wave using a diffraction grating, such as an optical waveguide Wood's Anomaly, but for any position in a thin film optical element, When plane waves are incident in a wide range of angles close to arbitrary, light does not propagate with high efficiency in the plane of the optical element (in the thin film).
[0010] しかしながら、 このような光学素子が存在するならば、 薄膜を構成する媒 質と光の相互作用を増大させることができる。 [0010] However, if such an optical element exists, the interaction between light and the medium constituting the thin film can be increased.
[001 1 ] また、 同一のコヒーレント光源から 2つ又はそれ以上の互いに平行に伝搬 するビームが得られるならば、 干渉を用いる光記録や計測に用いるのに有効 であるが、 従来の単一の光学素子では困難であった。 [001 1] Also, if two or more beams propagating in parallel to each other can be obtained from the same coherent light source, it is effective for optical recording and measurement using interference. However, it has been difficult with a conventional single optical element.
[0012] 本発明は、 上記状況に鑑みてなされたものであり、 従来困難又は不可能で あつた光の伝搬形態を実現する方法とその応用を提供する。 The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a method for realizing a light propagation form that has been difficult or impossible in the past and an application thereof.
課題を解決するための手段 Means for solving the problem
[0013] 第 1の発明は、 [0013] The first invention is:
屈折率が 1 . 2より大きい 2種以上の媒質からなる周期構造体であって、 含まれる媒質間の屈折率の比が 1 : 1 . 2より大きくなる組合せがあり、 基 本単位格子を構成する第 1から第 3の基本並進べクトルのうち、 第 1及び第 2の基本並進べクトルを含む面と直交する任意の軸を含み、 かつ第 1の基本 並進べクトルと平行な面および Zまたは第 2の基本並進べクトルと平行な面 に対して、 単位構造中の誘電率又は屈折率の分布および Zまたは基本単位格 子が非鏡映対称であることを特徴とする、 屈折率または誘電率が周期的に変 化する周期構造体。 A periodic structure consisting of two or more types of media whose refractive index is greater than 1.2. There is a combination in which the ratio of the refractive index between the contained media is greater than 1: 1.2, which constitutes the basic unit cell. Of the first to third basic translation vectors, including any axis perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second basic translation vectors, and a plane parallel to the first basic translation vector and Z Or the distribution of the dielectric constant or refractive index in the unit structure and the Z or basic unit scale are non-mirror symmetric with respect to the plane parallel to the second basic translational vector. A periodic structure whose dielectric constant changes periodically.
[0014] 第 2の発明は、 [0014] The second invention is:
屈折率が 1 . 2より大きい 2種以上の媒質からなる周期構造体であって、 含まれる媒質間の屈折率の比が 1 : 1 . 2より大きくなる組合せがあり、 単 位構造中の誘電率又は屈折率の分布および Zまたは基本単位格子が、 非回転 対称、 非反転対称であり、 基本単位格子を構成する第 1から第 3の基本並進 べクトルのうち第 1及び第 2の基本並進べクトルを含む面と直交する任意の 軸を含みかつ第 1の基本並進べクトルと平行な面および Zまたは第 2の基本 並進べクトルと平行な面に対して非鏡映対称であることを特徴とする、 屈折 率または誘電率が周期的に変化する周期構造体。 There are periodic structures consisting of two or more types of media whose refractive index is greater than 1.2, and there are combinations in which the ratio of the refractive index between the contained media is greater than 1: 1.2. The first or second basic translation of the first to third basic translation vectors that make up the basic unit cell, where the refractive index or refractive index distribution and Z or the basic unit cell are non-rotationally symmetric and non-inverted symmetric Be non-mirror-symmetric with respect to a plane containing any axis orthogonal to the plane containing the vector and parallel to the first basic translation vector and to a plane parallel to the Z or second basic translation vector A periodic structure having a periodically changing refractive index or dielectric constant.
[0015] 第 3の発明は、 [0015] The third invention provides
屈折率が 1 . 2より大きい 2種以上の媒質からなる周期構造体であって、 含まれる媒質間の屈折率の比が 1 : 1 . 2より大きくなる組合せがあり、 単 位構造中の誘電率又は屈折率の分布および Zまたは基本単位格子が、 並進対 称性のみ有することを特徴とする、 屈折率または誘電率が周期的に変化する 周期構造体。 [0016] 第 4の発明は、 There are periodic structures consisting of two or more types of media whose refractive index is greater than 1.2, and there are combinations in which the ratio of the refractive index between the contained media is greater than 1: 1.2. A periodic structure in which refractive index or dielectric constant changes periodically, characterized in that the refractive index or refractive index distribution and the Z or basic unit cell have only translational symmetry. [0016] The fourth invention is:
前記第 2の基本並進べクトルはゼロでない任意の長さを取りうることを特 徴とする、 第 1から第 3の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体。 The periodic structure according to any one of the first to third inventions, characterized in that the second basic translation vector can have any length that is not zero.
[0017] 第 5の発明は、 [0017] The fifth invention provides
前記第 1から第 3の基本並進べクトルのうちいずれか 2つの基本並進べク トルを含む面と残る 1つの基本並進べクトルとがなす角度が 6 0度より大き < 9 0度より小さいことを特徴とする、 第 1から第 4の発明のいずれかに記 載する周期構造体。 The angle formed by the plane containing any two of the first to third basic translation vectors and the remaining one of the basic translation vectors is greater than 60 degrees <90 degrees The periodic structure described in any one of the first to fourth inventions.
[0018] 第 6の発明は、 [0018] The sixth invention provides
前記周期構造体は薄膜が複数周期積層されてなリ、 前記薄膜層は周期的な 凹凸構造を有し、 該凹凸構造における凸部は最上部から最下部までの距離が 複数存在する凸部であることを特徴とする、 第 1から第 5の発明のいずれか に記載する周期構造体。 The periodic structure is formed by laminating a plurality of thin films, the thin film layer has a periodic concavo-convex structure, and the convex portion in the concavo-convex structure is a convex portion having a plurality of distances from the top to the bottom. There is provided the periodic structure according to any one of the first to fifth inventions.
[0019] 第 7の発明は、 [0019] The seventh invention provides
少なくとも 1つの基本並進べクトルの長さが 1 0 0 n mから 1 0 0 0 n m であり、 前記単位構造に含まれる媒質のうち少なくとも 1つが 2以上の屈折 率をもつことを特徴とする、 第 1から第 6の発明のいずれかに記載する周期 構造体。 The length of at least one basic translation vector is from 100 nm to 100 nm, and at least one of the media included in the unit structure has a refractive index of 2 or more. The periodic structure according to any one of the first to sixth inventions.
[0020] 第 8の発明は、 [0020] The eighth invention provides
第 1及び第 2の基本並進べクトルを含む面と直交する任意の軸を含み、 か つ第 1の基本並進べクトルと平行な面および Zまたは第 2の基本並進べク卜 ルと平行な面に対して、 電磁場が非鏡映対称の固有モードを呈することを特 徴とする、 第 1から第 7の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体。 Includes any axis orthogonal to the plane containing the first and second basic translation vectors, and parallel to the plane parallel to the first basic translation vector and Z or the second basic translation vector The periodic structure according to any one of the first to seventh inventions, wherein the electromagnetic field exhibits a non-mirror-symmetric eigenmode with respect to the surface.
[0021 ] 第 9の発明は、 [0021] The ninth invention provides
電磁場が、 第 1及び第 2の基本並進べクトルを含む面と直交する任意の軸 を含み、 かつ第 1の基本並進べクトルと平行な面および Zまたは第 2の基本 並進べクトルと平行な面に対して非鏡映対称であり、 前記軸に対して非回転 対称である、 固有モードを呈することを特徴とする、 第 1から第 7の発明の いずれかに記載する周期構造体。 The electromagnetic field includes any axis perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second basic translation vectors, and is parallel to the plane parallel to the first basic translation vector and Z or the second basic translation vector. Non-mirror-symmetric with respect to the surface, non-rotationally symmetric with respect to the axis, exhibiting eigenmodes, characterized in that The periodic structure described in any one.
[0022] 第 1 0の発明は、 [0022] The tenth aspect of the invention is:
励振の方位にかかわらず電磁場が、 第 1及び第 2の基本並進べクトルを含 む面と直交する任意の軸を含み、 かつ第 1の基本並進べクトルと平行な面お よび Zまたは第 2の基本並進べクトルと平行な面に対して非鏡映対称であり 、 前記軸に対して 3回以上の回転対称性をもたない、 固有モードを呈するこ とを特徴とする、 第 1から第 7の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体。 Regardless of the direction of excitation, the electromagnetic field includes any axis perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second basic translation vectors, and the plane parallel to the first basic translation vector and the Z or second Non-mirror symmetry with respect to a plane parallel to the basic translation vector, and having an eigenmode having no rotational symmetry three or more times with respect to the axis. The periodic structure according to any one of the seventh invention.
[0023] 第 1 1の発明は、 [0023] The first invention is as follows:
前記第 1から第 3の基本並進べクトルのうちいずれか 2つの基本並進べク トルを含む面に所定の角度をもって入射した電磁波のビームを、 該面と平行 な方向に伝搬させるか、 または該面に対して周期構造体と空気との臨界角以 上の角度で伝搬させることを特徴とする、 第 1から第 1 0の発明のいずれか に記載する周期構造体。 An electromagnetic wave beam incident at a predetermined angle on a surface including any two of the first to third basic translation vectors is propagated in a direction parallel to the surface, or the The periodic structure according to any one of the first to tenth aspects of the present invention, wherein the periodic structure and the air are propagated at an angle greater than a critical angle with respect to the surface.
[0024] 第 1 2の発明は、 [0024] The first and second inventions are:
入射ビームを互いに平行に伝搬する複数のビームに分岐させることを特徴 とする、 第 1から第 1 1の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体。 The periodic structure according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects, wherein the incident beam is branched into a plurality of beams propagating in parallel to each other.
[0025] 第 1 3の発明は、 [0025] The first invention is the
第 1 1の発明に記載するビームの伝搬方向または第 1 2の発明に記載する ビームの分岐方向が、 前記第 1又は第 2の基本並進べクトルの方向または前 記第 1から第 3の基本並進べクトルのうちいずれか 2つの基本並進べクトル を含む面に残る 1つの基本並進べクトルを投影した方向であることを特徴と する、 第 1 1または第 1 2の発明に記載する周期構造体。 The beam propagation direction described in the first invention or the beam branching direction described in the first invention is the direction of the first or second basic translation vector or the first to third basics. The periodic structure according to the first or first invention, characterized in that the direction is a projection of one basic translation vector remaining on a plane containing any two of the translation vectors. body.
[0026] 第 1 4の発明は、 [0026] The 14th invention is as follows:
入射ビームの入射角または入射位置または入射ビームの波長を変えること により、 第 1 1の発明における面内の逆方向に伝搬する 2つビームの強度比 、 または、 第 1 2の発明における同一方向に伝搬するビームの強度比または 分岐間隔の少なくともいずれか 1つが変化することを特徴とする、 第 1 1か ら第 1 3の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体。 [0027] 第 1 5の発明は、 By changing the incident angle or incident position of the incident beam or the wavelength of the incident beam, the intensity ratio of the two beams propagating in the opposite directions in the plane of the first invention, or the same direction in the first invention The periodic structure according to any one of the first to thirteenth inventions, wherein at least one of the intensity ratio of the propagating beam and the branching interval changes. [0027] The fifteenth aspect of the invention is:
第 1から第 7の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体と比べて基本単位格 子の断面積又は体積が同一であり、 おのおのに含まれる 1つの基本並進べク トルが同一であり、 単位構造における媒質の種類、 構成比率が同一であり、 そして、 鏡映対称な基本単位格子および単位構造による周期構造体が有する 反対称モードの存在する波長相当のエネルギーの中心値の ± 3 O o/o以内に相 当する波長において第 1 1から第 1 4の発明のいずれかに記載するビームの 伝搬形態を呈することを特徴とする、 屈折率または誘電率が周期的に変化す る周期構造体。 Compared to the periodic structure described in any one of the first to seventh inventions, the cross-sectional area or volume of the basic unit lattice is the same, and one basic translation vector included in each is the same, and the unit The type and composition ratio of the medium in the structure are the same, and the center value of the energy corresponding to the wavelength of the antisymmetric mode of the periodic unit structure with mirror-symmetric basic unit cell and unit structure is ± 3 O o / A periodic structure having a periodically changing refractive index or dielectric constant, characterized by exhibiting the beam propagation form described in any of the first to fourth inventions at a wavelength corresponding to within o .
[0028] 第 1 6の発明は、 [0028] The 16th invention is
前記周期構造体の単位構造内の媒質に P n接合または p i n接合が存在す ることを特徴とする、 第 1から第 1 5の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造 体。 The features that you exist P n junction or pi n junction in the medium of the unit within the structure of the periodic structure, the periodic structure described from the first to any of the first 5.
[0029] 第 1 7の発明は、 [0029] The first seventeenth invention is:
前記周期構造体中の媒質は透明導電体材料を含有し、 該周期構造体が電気 伝導性をもつことを特徴とする、 第 1から第 1 6の発明のいずれかに記載す る周期構造体。 The periodic structure according to any one of the first to the sixteenth inventions, wherein the medium in the periodic structure contains a transparent conductor material, and the periodic structure has electrical conductivity. .
[0030] 第 1 8の発明は、 [0030] The eighteenth aspect of the invention is:
前記周期構造体中の媒質は流体と固体とを含有することを特徴とする、 第 1から第 1 7の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体。 The periodic structure according to any one of the first to seventeenth aspects, wherein the medium in the periodic structure contains a fluid and a solid.
[0031 ] 第 1 9の発明は、 [0031] The nineteenth invention is
前記単位構造中の媒質の一部分に非線形光学材料、 発光性物質のいずれか を含有することを特徴とする、 第 1から第 1 8の発明のいずれかに記載する 周期構造体。 The periodic structure according to any one of the first to eighteenth inventions, wherein a part of the medium in the unit structure contains either a nonlinear optical material or a luminescent substance.
[0032] 第 2 0の発明は、 [0032] The 20th invention is
第 1から第 1 9の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体と、 該周期構造体 に接続され該周期構造体と媒質が連続する他の周期構造体とを有し、 前記周期構造体を構成する第 1から第 3の基本並進べクトルの和と前記他 の周期構造体を構成する第 1から第 3の基本並進べクトルの和とが異なるこ とを特徴とする、 複合周期構造体。 A periodic structure according to any one of the first to nineteenth aspects of the present invention, and another periodic structure connected to the periodic structure and having a continuous medium and the medium, wherein the periodic structure is The sum of the first to third basic translation vectors and the others A complex periodic structure characterized in that the sum of the first to third basic translation vectors constituting the periodic structure is different.
[0033] 第 2 1の発明は、 [0033] The second invention is
第 1から第 1 9の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体と該周期構造体に 接続された一様媒質とを有することを特徴とする、 複合周期構造体。 A composite periodic structure comprising the periodic structure according to any one of the first to nineteenth aspects of the invention and a uniform medium connected to the periodic structure.
[0034] 第 2 2の発明は、 [0034] The second invention is as follows:
凹凸形状が 1次元的な周期性または 2次元的な周期性をもって形成された 基板上に、 少なくとも異方性デポジションまたは異方性エッチングのいずれ か一方を用いて製造する周期構造体の製造方法であって、 A method of manufacturing a periodic structure in which at least one of anisotropic deposition and anisotropic etching is used on a substrate having an uneven shape formed with a one-dimensional periodicity or a two-dimensional periodicity. Because
堆積粒子またはエッチング粒子の基板に対する入射方向の平均が基板面に 対して垂直ではなく、 The average incident direction of deposited particles or etched particles to the substrate is not perpendicular to the substrate surface,
前記入射方向を前記基板面に投影した方向と、 前記周期性の方向とがなす 角度が 0度から 4 5度の範囲であることを特徴とする、 The angle formed by the direction in which the incident direction is projected onto the substrate surface and the direction of the periodicity is in a range of 0 to 45 degrees,
第 1から第 7の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体の製造方法。 The method for producing a periodic structure according to any one of the first to seventh inventions.
[0035] 第 2 3の発明は、 [0035] The second invention is as follows:
第 1から第 2 1の発明のいずれかに記載する周期構造体または複合周期構 造体と、 光源、 偏光子、 反射型偏光分離素子、 ウォークオフ型偏光分離素子 、 反射手段、 位相板、 回折格子、 散乱体、 空間光変調器、 電極、 感光体及び 受光器からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも 1つとを有することを特徴とする 、 デバイス。 The periodic structure or composite periodic structure according to any one of the first to second inventions, a light source, a polarizer, a reflective polarization separation element, a walk-off polarization separation element, a reflection means, a phase plate, and diffraction A device comprising at least one selected from the group consisting of a grating, a scatterer, a spatial light modulator, an electrode, a photoreceptor, and a light receiver.
[0036] 第 2 4の発明は、 [0036] The 24th invention is as follows:
平行ビーム源と、 第 1 1から第 1 4の発明いずれかに記載する周期構造体 と、 反射型偏光分離素子とを有し、 A parallel beam source, a periodic structure according to any of the first to fourth inventions, and a reflective polarization separation element,
前記周期構造体における第 1から第 3の基本並進べクトルのうちいずれか 2つの基本並進べクトルを含む平面と前記反射型偏光分離素子とが互いに平 行であり、 A plane including any two of the first to third basic translation vectors in the periodic structure and the reflective polarization separation element are parallel to each other;
前記反射型偏光分離素子によリ、 前記平行ビーム源からのビームが前記周 期構造体に複数回入射されることを特徴とする、 デバイス。 [0037] 第 2 5の発明は、 The device according to claim 1, wherein a beam from the parallel beam source is incident on the periodic structure a plurality of times by the reflective polarization separation element. [0037] The 25th invention includes
レーザー光源と、 空間光変調器と、 レンズと、 感光体と、 第 1 2の発明に 記載する周期構造体とを有し、 A laser light source, a spatial light modulator, a lens, a photoconductor, and the periodic structure described in the first and second inventions,
前記周期構造体によって、 前記レーザー光源から入射されたビームを、 入 射光と同一方向かつ互いに平行に伝搬する複数のビームに分岐させ、 By the periodic structure, the beam incident from the laser light source is branched into a plurality of beams propagating in the same direction as the incident light and in parallel with each other,
前記空間光変調器によって、 前記分岐させた複数のビームのうち少なくと も 1つのビームを透過させるかまたは反射させ、 The spatial light modulator transmits or reflects at least one of the plurality of branched beams,
前記レンズにより、 前記空間光変調器によって透過または反射させたビー ムを少なくとも含む複数のビームを前記感光体における同一の箇所に集光す ることを特徴とする、 デバイス。 The device, wherein the plurality of beams including at least a beam transmitted or reflected by the spatial light modulator are collected by the lens at the same location on the photoconductor.
発明の効果 The invention's effect
[0038] 本発明の最も好ましい実施形態によれば、 従来なしえなかった光の伝搬形 態が実現できる。 例えば任意の位置に対して、 広い入射角度範囲で平面波を 入射した場合に、 光学素子の面内に高効率で光を伝搬させることができる。 また入射したビームを、 平行な 2つのほぼ同一の偏波状態を有するビームま たは 3つ以上のビームに分岐させることができる。 [0038] According to the most preferred embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to realize a light propagation state that could not be achieved conventionally. For example, when a plane wave is incident on an arbitrary position in a wide incident angle range, light can be propagated with high efficiency in the plane of the optical element. In addition, the incident beam can be split into two parallel beams having almost the same polarization state or three or more beams.
図面の簡単な説明 Brief Description of Drawings
[0039] [図 1 ]図 1は、 一例としての周期構造体の断面斜視図である。 FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a periodic structure as an example.
[図 2]図 2は、 図 1に示す周期構造体の基本単位格子および単位構造を示す図 である。 図 2 ( a )は基本単位格子を示す図であり、 図 2 ( b )は単位構造を示 す図である。 FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a basic unit cell and a unit structure of the periodic structure shown in FIG. Fig. 2 (a) is a diagram showing the basic unit cell, and Fig. 2 (b) is a diagram showing the unit structure.
[図 3]図 3は周期構造体の基本単位格子および単位構造の一種である。 図 3 ( a )は基本単位格子を示す図であり、 図 3 ( b )は単位構造を示す図である。 [FIG. 3] FIG. 3 shows a basic unit cell and a unit structure of a periodic structure. Fig. 3 (a) shows the basic unit cell, and Fig. 3 (b) shows the unit structure.
[図 4]図 4は、 図 3に示す基本単位格子による無限周期の周期構造体の Z方向 から入射する T E偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 [FIG. 4] FIG. 4 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure having an infinite period formed by the basic unit cell shown in FIG.
[図 5]図 5は、 図 2に示す基本単位格子による無限周期の周期構造体の Z方向 から入射する T E偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 [FIG. 5] FIG. 5 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure having an infinite period by the basic unit cell shown in FIG.
[図 6]図 6は、 図 3に示す基本単位格子による無限周期の周期構造体の Z X平 面に対して平行で Z軸から 10度傾いた方向から入射する TE偏波の波長を横 軸にしたバンド図である。 [Fig. 6] Fig. 6 shows the ZX plane of a periodic structure with an infinite period using the basic unit cell shown in Fig. 3. It is a band diagram with the horizontal axis representing the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from a direction that is parallel to the surface and tilted 10 degrees from the Z axis.
[図 7]図 7は、 図 3に示す基本単位格子による無限周期の周期構造体の Z方向 から入射する T M偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 [FIG. 7] FIG. 7 is a band diagram with the horizontal axis representing the wavelength of the TM polarization incident from the Z direction of the infinite periodic structure having the basic unit cell shown in FIG.
[図 8]図 8は、 図 2に示す基本単位格子による無限周期の周期構造体の Z方向 から入射する T M偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 [FIG. 8] FIG. 8 is a band diagram with the horizontal axis representing the wavelength of the TM polarization incident from the Z direction of the infinite periodic structure having the basic unit cell shown in FIG.
[図 9]図 9は、 図 3に示す基本単位格子による無限周期の周期構造体の Z X平 面に対して平行で Z軸から 1 0度傾いた方向から入射する TM偏波の波長を 横軸にしたバンド図である。 [Fig. 9] Fig. 9 shows the wavelength of the TM polarized wave incident from the direction tilted 10 degrees from the Z axis parallel to the ZX plane of the periodic structure with infinite period by the basic unit cell shown in Fig. 3. It is the band figure made into an axis.
[図 10]図 10は、 自己クローニング型 2次元フォトニック結晶と該結晶に平行 ビームを垂直入射したときの出射光の伝搬を示す図である。 図 10(a)は側面 図、 図 10(b)は正面図である。 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a self-cloning type two-dimensional photonic crystal and propagation of emitted light when a parallel beam is perpendicularly incident on the crystal. Fig. 10 (a) is a side view and Fig. 10 (b) is a front view.
[図 11]図 11は、 自己クローニング型 2次元フォトニック結晶と該結晶に平行 ビームを小さな入射角をもって斜入射したときの出射光の伝搬を示す図であ る。 図 11 (a)は側面図、 図 11 (b)は正面図である。 [FIG. 11] FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the propagation of outgoing light when a self-cloning type two-dimensional photonic crystal and a parallel beam are obliquely incident on the crystal with a small incident angle. Fig. 11 (a) is a side view and Fig. 11 (b) is a front view.
[図 12]図 12は、 自己クローニング型 2次元フォトニック結晶と該結晶に平行 ビームを垂直入射したときの出射光の伝搬を示す図である。 図 12(a)は正面 図、 図 12(b)は側面図である。 FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a self-cloning type two-dimensional photonic crystal and propagation of emitted light when a parallel beam is perpendicularly incident on the crystal. Fig. 12 (a) is a front view and Fig. 12 (b) is a side view.
[図 13]図 13は、 自己クローニング型 2次元フォトニック結晶と該結晶に平行 ビームを入射したときの出射光の伝搬を示す図である。 図 13(a)は正面図、 図 13(b)は側面図である。 FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a self-cloning type two-dimensional photonic crystal and propagation of emitted light when a parallel beam is incident on the crystal. FIG. 13 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 13 (b) is a side view.
[図 14]図 14は図 10記載の基板 1002上に形成された 「AC-2DPhC」 1001、 1次元 多層膜 1003および空気の間での光の伝搬を拡大して表記したモデル図である [FIG. 14] FIG. 14 is a model diagram in which the propagation of light between the “AC-2DPhC” 1001, the one-dimensional multilayer film 1003 and the air formed on the substrate 1002 shown in FIG. 10 is enlarged.
[図 15]図 15は図 14記載の基板 1402上に形成された 「AC-2DPhC」 1401、 1次元 多層膜 1403および空気の間での光の伝搬を拡大して表記したモデル図である [FIG. 15] FIG. 15 is an enlarged model of the light propagation between “AC-2DPhC” 1401, the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403 and air formed on the substrate 1402 shown in FIG.
[図 16]図 16は、 自己クローニング型フォトニック結晶における基本並進べク トルが全て直交する基本単位格子と媒質の分布が偏った単位構造のモデルを 示す図である。 図 16(a)は基本単位格子を示す図であり、 図 16(b)は単位構 造を示す図である。 [Figure 16] Figure 16 shows the basic translation vector in self-cloning photonic crystals. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a model of a unit structure in which a basic unit lattice in which all the tols are orthogonal and a medium distribution is biased. FIG. 16 (a) is a diagram showing a basic unit cell, and FIG. 16 (b) is a diagram showing a unit structure.
[図 17]図 17は、 基板と基板に入射する堆積粒子又はエッチング粒子の方向を 示す正面図である。 FIG. 17 is a front view showing a substrate and the direction of deposited particles or etching particles incident on the substrate.
[図 18]図 18は、 基板と基板に入射する堆積粒子又はエッチング粒子の方向を 示す上面図である。 FIG. 18 is a top view showing the substrate and the direction of the deposited particles or etching particles incident on the substrate.
[図 19]図 19は、 ターゲッ卜及び基板の位置関係を示す上面図である。 FIG. 19 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the target and the substrate.
[図 20]図 20は、 ターゲッ卜と基板との位置関係及び堆積粒子又はエッチング 粒子またはエッチング粒子の入射方向を示す正面及び側面図である。 図 20(a )は正面図、 図 20(b)は側面図である。 FIG. 20 is a front view and a side view showing the positional relationship between the target and the substrate, and the incident direction of the deposited particles, etching particles, or etching particles. FIG. 20 (a) is a front view, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view.
[図 21]図 21は図 1に示す基板 124を表す模式的な斜視図である。 FIG. 21 is a schematic perspective view showing the substrate 124 shown in FIG.
[図 22]図 22は図 1に示す基板 124および整形層 112を表す図である。 FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the substrate 124 and the shaping layer 112 shown in FIG.
[図 23]図 23は実際に作製した 2次元自己クローニング型フォトニック結晶 (2 [Figure 23] Figure 23 shows the actual 2D self-cloning photonic crystal (2
D-横崩し ACPC) の Z X平面における断面の電子顕微鏡写真である。 It is an electron micrograph of a cross section in the Z X plane of (D-collapse ACPC).
[図 24]図 24は透過特性のグラフである。 図 24(a)は入射ビームが TE偏波、 図 24(b)は入射ビームが TM偏波の場合にそれぞれ対応する特性である。 FIG. 24 is a transmission characteristic graph. Figure 24 (a) shows the characteristics corresponding to the case where the incident beam is TE-polarized, and Figure 24 (b) shows the characteristics corresponding to the case where the incident beam is TM-polarized.
[図 25]図 25はホロダラフィック記録装置の基本構成を示す側面図である。 [FIG. 25] FIG. 25 is a side view showing the basic structure of a hodara-frac recording apparatus.
[図 26]図 26は記録時の動作を示す側面図である。 FIG. 26 is a side view showing the operation during recording.
[図 27]図 27は再生時の動作を示す側面図である。 FIG. 27 is a side view showing an operation during reproduction.
[図 28]図 28は実施例 2に用いる H B Sを示す図である。 FIG. 28 is a view showing H B S used in Example 2.
[図 29]図 29は偏光補償型オプティカルインテグレータおよび入出射する光の 伝搬を示す図である。 FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a polarization-compensating optical integrator and propagation of incoming and outgoing light.
[図 30]図 30は a-SiCと薄膜多結晶シリコンからなる 「2D-横崩し ACPCj をべ一 スにした光電変換装置の側面模式図である。 [FIG. 30] FIG. 30 is a schematic side view of a “2D-collapsed ACPCj-based photoelectric conversion device based on a-SiC and thin-film polycrystalline silicon.
[図 31]図 31は図 30に示す 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 3003の基本単位格子および単位構 造を表す。 図 31 (a)は基本単位格子であり、 図 31(b)は単位構造である。 FIG. 31 shows the basic unit cell and unit structure of “2D-collapse ACPC” 3003 shown in FIG. Fig. 31 (a) shows the basic unit cell, and Fig. 31 (b) shows the unit structure.
[図 32]図 32は、 Ti02、 Sn02、 ヨウ素溶液を用いて作製した 3次元フォトニック 結晶の断面図である。 [Fig.32] Fig. 32 shows three-dimensional photonics produced using Ti0 2 , Sn0 2 , and iodine solutions. It is sectional drawing of a crystal.
符号の説明 Explanation of symbols
[0040] 201 一つめの P TV [0040] 201 First P TV
202 二つめの P TV 202 Second P TV
1001 自己クローニング型 2次元フォトニック結晶 1001 Self-cloning type 2D photonic crystal
1004 入射平行ビーム 1004 Incident parallel beam
1005 出力ビーム 1005 Output beam
1006 出力ビーム 1006 Output beam
1007 出力ビーム 1007 Output beam
1008 出力ビーム 1008 Output beam
1009 出力ビーム 1009 Output beam
1010 出力ビーム 1010 Output beam
3107 i型多結晶シリコンが占める領域 3107 Area occupied by i-type polycrystalline silicon
3108 i型多結晶シリコンが占める領域 3108 Area occupied by i-type polycrystalline silicon
3109 n型多結晶シリコンが占める領域 3109 Area occupied by n-type polycrystalline silicon
3110 p型アモルファスシリコンカーバイ卜が占める領域 3110 Area occupied by p-type amorphous silicon carbide
3111 p型アモルファスシリコンカーバイ卜が占める領域 3111 Area occupied by p-type amorphous silicon carbide
3112 p型アモルファスシリコンカーバイ卜が占める領域 3112 Area occupied by p-type amorphous silicon carbide
発明を実施するための最良の形態 BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0041] 1. 1から 7の の [0041] 1. from 1 to 7
以下、 第 1から第 7の発明について、 例示的に図面を参照しつつ、 詳細に 説明する。 Hereinafter, the first to seventh inventions will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[0042] 図 1は、 一例としての周期構造体および周辺部材の断面斜視図である。 屈 折率 n ½1.5の媒質が占める領域 101から領域 111、 ハッチングされて示される 屈折率 n 4の媒質が占める領域 113から領域 123が周期構造体をなす。 符号 124は基板、 符号 112は基板と周期構造体の間の中間層 (整形層) を示す。 図 1記載の周期構造体は一種の多層薄膜であり、 領域 101から領域 111の膜厚は 各々約 150nm、 領域 113から領域 123の膜厚は各々約 100nmである。 [0043] 図 2は、 図 1に示す周期構造体の基本単位格子 (primは ive eelし 以下 Γ P r C」 と略す) および単位構造 (basis、 以下 「BAS」 と略記する) を示 す図である。 図 2 (a)は P r Cを示す図であり、 一つめの基本並進ベクトル (primitive translation vector. 以下 Γρ τ Vj と略記する) 201は長さ 41 Onmで X方向と平行であり、 二つめの PT V202は長さ 251nmで X Y平面に対し て 86度の角度をもち、 かつ ZX平面に対して平行である。 三つめの P TVは Y軸と平行であり、 長さは任意 (不定) である。 ここで、 長さが不定とは B A S中の媒質の分布が Y方向については一様であり、 P T Vの長さは一意に 定義できない (任意) ことを示す。 符号 203〜206は格子点である。 図 2 (b) は B ASを示す図であり、 三つめの P T Vの中点を含む一つめの P T V201と 二つめの PTV202を含む面と平行な面での断面図である。 BASは、 可視光 の範囲で n =2.4の媒質が占める領域 207と n =1.5の媒質が占める領域 208及 び n = 1.5の媒質が占める領域 209とからなる。 ただし周期構造体としては領 域 208と領域 209とは連続しておリ、 B A Sは実質的に 2つの領域からなる。 また符号 210、 211及び 212は n =2.4である媒質の領域の頂点である (また、 n ½1.5である媒質が占める領域の頂点でもある) 。 図 2に示す P r Cおよび BASによる周期構造体は 2次元自己クローニング型フォトニック結晶 (以 下、 「AC-2DPhC」 と略記する) の一種となる。 FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a periodic structure and peripheral members as an example. A region 101 to a region 111 occupied by a medium having a refractive index n½1.5, and a region 113 to a region 123 occupied by a medium having a refractive index n 4 shown by hatching form a periodic structure. Reference numeral 124 denotes a substrate, and reference numeral 112 denotes an intermediate layer (shaping layer) between the substrate and the periodic structure. The periodic structure shown in FIG. 1 is a kind of multilayer thin film, and the film thicknesses of the region 101 to the region 111 are each about 150 nm, and the film thicknesses of the region 113 to the region 123 are each about 100 nm. [0043] Fig. 2 shows the basic unit cell (prim is ive eel and abbreviated as Γ P r C) and unit structure (basis, abbreviated as "BAS") of the periodic structure shown in Fig. 1. FIG. Fig. 2 (a) is a diagram showing P r C. The first primitive translation vector (hereinafter abbreviated as Γρ τ Vj) 201 is 41 Onm in length and parallel to the X direction. The PT V202 is 251 nm long, has an angle of 86 degrees with respect to the XY plane, and is parallel to the ZX plane. The third P TV is parallel to the Y axis and the length is arbitrary (undefined). Here, indefinite length means that the distribution of the medium in the BAS is uniform in the Y direction, and that the length of the PTV cannot be defined uniquely (arbitrary). Reference numerals 203 to 206 denote lattice points. Fig. 2 (b) is a diagram showing BAS, which is a cross-sectional view in a plane parallel to the plane containing the first PT V201 containing the midpoint of the third PTV and the second PTV202. BAS consists of a region 207 occupied by a medium with n = 2.4, a region 208 occupied by a medium with n = 1.5, and a region 209 occupied by a medium with n = 1.5 in the visible light range. However, as a periodic structure, region 208 and region 209 are continuous, and BAS is essentially composed of two regions. Reference numerals 210, 211, and 212 are vertices of a region of the medium where n = 2.4 (and also vertices of a region occupied by the medium of n ½1.5). The periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 is a kind of two-dimensional self-cloning photonic crystal (hereinafter abbreviated as “AC-2DPhC”).
[0044] 図 2に示す P r C及び B A Sによる周期構造体または図 2に示す P r C及 び B ASを 3次元周期構造体に拡張した P r C及び BASによる周期構造体 は、 上述する第 1から第 7の発明を説明するものである。 なお、 図 2に示す P r C及び BASを 3次元周期構造体に拡張した P r C及び BASとは、 Y Z平面の断面図が図 2と同じで、 かつ X Y平面の断面図が図 2と同じである P r C及び BASである。 [0044] The periodic structure by PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 or the periodic structure by PrC and BAS, which is an extension of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 to a three-dimensional periodic structure, is described above. The first to seventh inventions will be described. Note that Pr C and BAS shown in Fig. 2 in which P r C and BAS are expanded to a three-dimensional periodic structure have the same cross-sectional view in the YZ plane as in Fig. 2 and the cross-sectional view in the XY plane as in Fig. P r C and BAS are the same.
[0045] 第 1の発明に関しては、 図 2に示す P r C及び BASにより説明できる。 [0045] The first invention can be explained by P r C and BAS shown in FIG.
これは、 図 2に示す P r C及び B ASによる周期構造体が、 第 1の PTVと して PTV201、 第 2の PTVとして前記 Y軸と平行な不定長の PTVを選択 した場合に、 P r C中の第 1及び第 2の PTVを含む面 (ここでは XY平面 と平行) と直交する任意の軸 (ここでは Z軸と平行な任意の軸) を含み、 第 2の PTVと平行な面 (ここでは YZ平面と平行な面、 Xは任意) が P r C および B A S中の屈折率の分布のいずれに対して鏡映面とはなリえず、 一方 、 P r C中の第 1及び第 2の P TVを含む面と直交する任意の軸を含み、 第 1の PTV201と平行な面 (ここでは ZX平面と平行な面、 Yは任意) は第 2 の P TVの長さの中点を含む面の場合に P r Cおよび B AS中の屈折率の分 布のいずれに対しても鏡映面となるからである。 This is because the periodic structure by PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 selects PTV201 as the first PTV and PTV of indefinite length parallel to the Y axis as the second PTV. r The plane containing the first and second PTV in C (here, the XY plane) Is parallel to the second PTV (in this case, parallel to the YZ plane, where X is arbitrary). And any of the refractive index distributions in BAS cannot be mirrored, while containing any axis orthogonal to the plane containing the first and second P TVs in P r C, The plane parallel to the first PTV201 (here the plane parallel to the ZX plane, Y is arbitrary) is the plane containing the midpoint of the length of the second PTV, and the refractive index in PrC and BAS This is because it becomes a mirror surface for any of the distributions.
[0046] 第 2の発明に関しては、 図 2に示す P r C及び B A Sによる周期構造体に より説明できる。 これは、 B AS中の屈折率の分布が非回転対称及び非反転 対称であるからである。 なお、 P r Cは 2回の回転対称性を有している。 ま た、 「単位構造中の誘電率又は屈折率の分布および Zまたは基本単位格子が 、 非回転対称、 非反転対称」 とは、 いずれの軸、 点に対する回転操作、 反転 操作を行っても単位構造中の誘電率と屈折率のいずれかの分布および基本単 位格子が元と同じにならないか、 もしくは単位構造中の誘電率と屈折率のい ずれかの分布または基本単位格子が元と同じにならないことを意味する。 [0046] The second invention can be explained by the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in FIG. This is because the refractive index distribution in BAS is non-rotational and non-inversion symmetric. P r C has two-fold rotational symmetry. Also, “The distribution of dielectric constant or refractive index in the unit structure and Z or basic unit cell is non-rotation symmetric, non-inversion symmetry” means that the unit can be rotated or inverted with respect to any axis or point. Either the distribution of dielectric constant and refractive index in the structure and the basic unit lattice are not the same as the original, or the distribution of either dielectric constant and refractive index in the unit structure or the basic unit lattice is the same as the original It means not to be.
[0047] 第 3の発明に関しては、 図 2に示す P r C及び B ASを 3次元周期構造体 に拡張した B A S中の屈折率の分布が並進を除く対称性を持たない例によリ 説明できる。 なお、 周期構造体であるため、 当然に並進対称性は有する。 な お屈折率に対する記述は誘電率 εに対しても成り立つ。 [0047] The third invention relates to an example in which the refractive index distribution in BAS in which PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2 are expanded to a three-dimensional periodic structure has no symmetry except translation. it can. Since it is a periodic structure, it naturally has translational symmetry. The description for the refractive index also holds for the dielectric constant ε.
[0048] 第 4の発明に関しては、 図 2に示す P r C及び BASにおいて第 2の ΡΤ Vがゼ口でない任意の長さを取りうる例により説明できる。 このことは B A S中の媒質の分布が第 2の P T Vの方向について一様であり、 いわゆる連続 的並進対称性を有していることによる。 [0048] The fourth invention can be explained by an example in which the second ΡΤ V can take any length that is not the opening in PrC and BAS shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that the distribution of the medium in B A S is uniform in the direction of the second P T V and has so-called continuous translational symmetry.
[0049] 第 5の発明に関しては、 図 2で説明することができる。 これは、 図 2 (a) に示す第 1及び第 2の PTVを含む面 (XY平面と平行) と残る第 3の PT Vの間になる角度が 86度であり、 60度より大きく 90度より小さいからである 前記第 1から第 3の P TVのうちいずれか 2つの P TVを含む面と残る 1 つの P T Vとがなす角度については、 好ましくは 65度よリ大きく 85度よリ小 さく、 より好ましくは 75度より大きく 85度より小さい。 65度より大きく 85度 より小さいと、 後述する第 11の発明において第 1及び第 3の P TVを含む面 と平行な面である周期構造体の表面に入射した電磁波が、 第 1及び第 3の P TVを含む面と平行な方向により大きい比率をもって伝搬するから有利であ る。 また、 75度より大きく 85度より小さいと、 後述する第 22の発明による製 造が容易であると共に、 後述する第 11の発明において第 1及び第 3の P TV を含む面と平行な面である周期構造体の表面に入射した電磁波が、 第 1及び 第 3の P TVを含む面と平行な方向により大きい比率をもって伝搬させるこ とができるため、 有利である。 [0049] The fifth invention can be described with reference to FIG. This is because the angle between the plane containing the first and second PTV shown in Fig. 2 (a) (parallel to the XY plane) and the remaining third PT V is 86 degrees, greater than 60 degrees and 90 degrees This is because the surface including any two P TVs among the first to third P TVs remains and remains 1 The angle formed by two PTVs is preferably greater than 65 degrees and smaller than 85 degrees, more preferably greater than 75 degrees and less than 85 degrees. If it is larger than 65 degrees and smaller than 85 degrees, the electromagnetic waves incident on the surface of the periodic structure, which is a plane parallel to the plane including the first and third PTVs, in the eleventh invention to be described later, This is advantageous because it propagates with a larger ratio in the direction parallel to the plane containing the PTV. If the angle is greater than 75 degrees and smaller than 85 degrees, the manufacture according to the 22nd invention described later is easy, and the 11th invention described later is a plane parallel to the plane including the first and third PTVs. This is advantageous because electromagnetic waves incident on the surface of a periodic structure can propagate with a larger ratio in a direction parallel to the plane including the first and third PTVs.
第 6の発明に関しては、 図 1に示すような、 複数の凹凸構造を有する薄膜 が Z軸方向に積層されてなる周期構造体により説明できる。 また、 図 2から n =2.4の媒質の領域の頂点 210は凸部の最上部、 頂点 211および頂点 212は凸 部の最下部にあたることがわかる。 そして、 頂点 210と頂点 211との距離は、 頂点 210と頂点 212との距離とは異なることから、 凸部の最上部から最下部ま での距離が 2種類 (複数) 存在する。 この形態は BASの対称性を崩す最も 簡便な方法の 1つである。 また、 後述するように、 第 1及び第 3の P TVの 長さと第 11または第 12の発明を特徴づける伝搬を示す電磁波 (光) の波長と の間には以下の関係がある。 The sixth invention can be explained by a periodic structure formed by laminating thin films having a plurality of concavo-convex structures in the Z-axis direction as shown in FIG. In addition, it can be seen from FIG. 2 that the vertex 210 of the medium region of n = 2.4 corresponds to the uppermost portion of the convex portion, and the vertexes 211 and 212 correspond to the lowermost portion of the convex portion. Since the distance between the vertex 210 and the vertex 211 is different from the distance between the vertex 210 and the vertex 212, there are two types (plurality) of distances from the top to the bottom of the convex portion. This form is one of the simplest ways to break the symmetry of BAS. Further, as will be described later, there is the following relationship between the length of the first and third PTVs and the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave (light) indicating the propagation characterizing the eleventh or twelfth invention.
第 11または第 12の発明を特徴づける伝搬を示す電磁波 (光) の波長は、 第 1の PTVに対して BASに含まれる最も大きな屈折率をもつ媒質の屈折率 をかけた値 (例えば図 1記載の周期構造体においては波長約 980nm) 以下であ リ、 好ましくは第 1の P TVに対して B ASに含まれる媒質の屈折率の加重 平均をかけた値 (例えば図 1記載の周期構造体においては波長約 760nm) 以下 であり、 より好ましくは第 1の PTVに対して BASに含まれる媒質の屈折 率の加重平均をかけた値以下でかつ第 3の PTVに対して BASに含まれる 媒質の屈折率の加重平均をかけた値以下でかつ第 1の P TV以上 (例えば図 1記載の周期構造体においては波長約 410nm以上 465nm以下) である。 [0051] 第 7の発明に関しては、 図 2に示されるように第 1の PTVが 410nm、 第 2 の P TVが不定 (任意) 、 第 3の PTVが約 251nmであるため、 図 2における 第 1及び第 3の PTVが 100nmから 1 mの長さの条件を満たす。 かつ含まれ る一方の媒質の n =2.4である点についても条件を満たす。 なお P T Vの長さ と含まれる媒質の屈折率については対応する電磁波の波長と密接な相関があ る。 The wavelength of the electromagnetic wave (light) indicating the propagation characterizing the 11th or 12th invention is a value obtained by multiplying the first PTV by the refractive index of the medium having the largest refractive index contained in the BAS (for example, FIG. 1). In the periodic structure described, the wavelength is about 980 nm) or less, preferably a value obtained by multiplying the first PTV by the weighted average of the refractive index of the medium contained in the BAS (for example, the periodic structure shown in FIG. 1). In the body, the wavelength is about 760 nm or less, more preferably less than the value obtained by multiplying the first PTV by the weighted average of the refractive index of the medium contained in the BAS and included in the BAS for the third PTV. It is not more than the value obtained by multiplying the weighted average of the refractive index of the medium and not less than the first PTV (for example, in the periodic structure shown in FIG. 1, the wavelength is not less than 410 nm and not more than 465 nm). [0051] Regarding the seventh invention, as shown in FIG. 2, the first PTV is 410 nm, the second PTV is indefinite (optional), and the third PTV is about 251 nm. The 1st and 3rd PTVs meet the requirements of lengths from 100nm to 1m. The condition is also satisfied for the point that n = 2.4 of one of the included media. Note that the length of the PTV and the refractive index of the medium included are closely correlated with the wavelength of the corresponding electromagnetic wave.
前記少なくとも 1つの P TVの長さについては、 後述する第 1 1の発明に おいて第 1及び第 2の P T Vを含む面と平行な面である周期構造体の表面に 入射した電磁波の波長が紫外線領域の場合は、 好ましくは 100nmから 400nm、 よリ好ましくは 150nmから 350nmとする。 同じく電磁波の波長が可視光領域の 場合は、 好ましくは 200nmから 700nm、 より好ましくは 350nmから 500nmとする 。 同じく電磁波の波長が近赤外領域の場合は、 好ましくは 300nmから 1000nm、 より好ましくは 400nmから 700nmとする。 Regarding the length of the at least one PTV, the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave incident on the surface of the periodic structure, which is a plane parallel to the plane including the first and second PTVs in the first aspect of the invention described later, is In the ultraviolet region, the thickness is preferably 100 nm to 400 nm, more preferably 150 nm to 350 nm. Similarly, when the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave is in the visible light region, it is preferably 200 nm to 700 nm, more preferably 350 nm to 500 nm. Similarly, when the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave is in the near infrared region, it is preferably 300 nm to 1000 nm, more preferably 400 nm to 700 nm.
[0052] なお、 P r Cは、 例外を除いて、 最も対称性のよい一般的な P r Cの選択 により定義されるものとする。 [0052] It should be noted that P r C is defined by a general selection of P r C with the best symmetry, with the exception.
[0053] 2. 8から 10の の言 [0053] 2. Words from 8 to 10
以下、 第 8から第 10の発明について、 例示的に図面を参照しつつ、 詳細に 説明する。 Hereinafter, the eighth to tenth aspects of the invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[0054] 図 3は周期構造体の P r Cおよび BASの一種である。 図 3 (a)は P r C を示す図であり、 一つめの P T V301の長さは 41 Onmで X方向と平行であリ、 二つめの P T V302の長さは 251nmで Z軸に対して平行である。 三つめの P T Vは Y軸と平行であり、 長さは任意 (不定) である。 長さが不定とは BAS 中の媒質の分布が Y方向については一様であり、 P T Vの長さは一意に定義 できない (任意) ことを示す。 符号 303〜306は格子点である。 [0054] FIG. 3 is a kind of P r C and BAS of the periodic structure. Figure 3 (a) shows P r C. The length of the first PT V301 is 41 Onm, parallel to the X direction, and the length of the second PT V302 is 251 nm with respect to the Z axis. Parallel. The third P T V is parallel to the Y axis and the length is arbitrary (undefined). Indefinite length means that the distribution of the medium in BAS is uniform in the Y direction, and the length of PTV cannot be uniquely defined (optional). Reference numerals 303 to 306 are lattice points.
[0055] 図 3 (b)は B ASを示す図であり、 三つめの P TVの中点を含む一つめ及 び二つめの P TVを含む面と平行な面での断面図である。 BASは、 可視光 の範囲で n =2.4の媒質が占める領域 307と n =1.5の媒質が占める領域 308及 び n = 1.5の媒質が占める領域 309からなる。 ただし周期構造体としては領域 3 08と領域 309は連続しており、 B A Sは実質的に 2つの領域からなる。 図 10に 示す P r Cおよび B A Sによる周期構造体は AC-2DPhCの一種となる。 [0055] FIG. 3 (b) is a diagram showing the BAS, and is a cross-sectional view in a plane parallel to the plane including the first and second PTVs including the midpoint of the third PTV. BAS consists of a region 307 occupied by a medium with n = 2.4 in the range of visible light, a region 308 occupied by a medium with n = 1.5, and a region 309 occupied by a medium with n = 1.5. However, as a periodic structure, region 3 08 and region 309 are contiguous, and BAS consists essentially of two regions. The periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 10 is a kind of AC-2DPhC.
[0056] 図 3に示す P r Cと B A Sと、 図 2に示す P r C及び B A Sとは、 互いの 一つめ及び三つめの P T Vの長さが同一で、 P r Cがなす 6面体の体積が同 一である。 また、 含まれる全ての媒質の屈折率及びその充填率が同一である 。 一方、 図 3に示す P r C及び B A Sは、 P T V301と P T V302を含む面と 直交する軸と P T V301の中点とを含む面に対して鏡映対称であり、 2回の回 転対称性と反転対称性を有する。 [0056] P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 3 and P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 2 are the hexahedrons formed by P r C with the same first and third PTV lengths. The volume is the same. Moreover, the refractive index and the filling rate of all the contained media are the same. On the other hand, PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 3 are mirror-symmetric with respect to the plane including the axis perpendicular to the plane containing PT V301 and PT V302 and the midpoint of PT V301, and two rotational symmetry. And inversion symmetry.
[0057] 図 4は、 図 3に示す P r Cによる無限周期の周期構造体の Z方向から入射 する T E偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 大きな点 (太い線) で表 されるのが対称モード、 小さい点 (細い線) で表されるのが反対称モードを 示す。 反対称モードの第 1バンドは波長約 680nmから波長約 790nmに存在し、 反対称モードの第 2バンドは波長約 440nmから波長約 540nmの範囲で存在し、 反対称モードの第 3バンドは波長約 430nm以下で存在する。 なお反対称モード の第 3バンドは偶対称モードのバンドと重なり合つている。 FIG. 4 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure with an infinite period due to PrC shown in FIG. A large point (thick line) represents the symmetric mode, and a small point (thin line) represents the anti-symmetric mode. The first band of the antisymmetric mode exists from the wavelength of about 680 nm to the wavelength of about 790 nm, the second band of the antisymmetric mode exists from the wavelength of about 440 nm to the wavelength of about 540 nm, and the third band of the antisymmetric mode is about the wavelength. Present below 430nm. The third band of antisymmetric mode overlaps with the band of even symmetric mode.
[0058] 図 5は、 図 2に示す P r Cによる無限周期の周期構造体の Z方向から入射 する T E偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 図 6は、 図 3に示す P r Cによる無限周期の周期構造体の Z X平面に対して平行で Z軸から 10度傾い た方向から入射する T E偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 FIG. 5 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of the TE polarization incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure with an infinite period due to PrC shown in FIG. Fig. 6 is a band diagram with the horizontal axis representing the wavelength of TE polarized light incident from a direction tilted by 10 degrees from the Z axis and parallel to the ZX plane of the periodic structure with infinite period due to PrC shown in Fig. 3. is there.
[0059] 図 6は、 図 3に示す P r Cによる無限周期の周期構造体の Z方向から入射 する T M偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 大きな点 (太い線) で表 されるのが対称モード、 小さい点 (細い線) で表されるのが反対称モードを 示す。 反対称モードの第 1バンドは波長約 580nmから波長約 720nmに存在し、 反対称モードの第 2バンドは波長約 400nmから波長約 550nmの範囲で存在する 。 なお反対称モードの第 2バンドは偶対称モードのバンドとほぼ重なり合つ ている。 [0059] FIG. 6 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis indicates the wavelength of the TM polarization incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure having an infinite period due to PrC shown in FIG. A large point (thick line) represents the symmetric mode, and a small point (thin line) represents the anti-symmetric mode. The first band of the antisymmetric mode exists from a wavelength of about 580 nm to a wavelength of about 720 nm, and the second band of the antisymmetric mode exists from a wavelength of about 400 nm to a wavelength of about 550 nm. The second band of antisymmetric mode almost overlaps with the band of even symmetric mode.
[0060] 図 7は、 図 2に示す P r Cによる無限周期の周期構造体の Z方向から入射 する T M偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 図 8は、 図 3に示す P r cによる無限周期の周期構造体の Z X平面に対して平行で Z軸から 10度傾い た方向から入射する T M偏波の波長を横軸にしたバンド図である。 [0060] FIG. 7 is a band diagram in which the horizontal axis represents the wavelength of the TM polarized wave incident from the Z direction of the periodic structure having an infinite period due to PrC shown in FIG. Figure 8 shows the P r shown in Figure 3. It is a band diagram with the horizontal axis of the TM polarization wavelength incident from a direction parallel to the ZX plane of the periodic structure with an infinite period by c and tilted 10 degrees from the Z axis.
[0061 ] 第 8の発明に関しては、 図 5及び図 8に示されるバンド図中のすべてのバ ンドにより説明できる。 図 5及び図 8に示されるバンド図中のすべてのバン ドは対称モードと反対称モードの区別ができない。 これは P r C及び B A S が既に第 1及び第 2の P T Vを含む面 (図 2における X Y平面) と直交する 任意の軸 (図 2における Z軸と平行な軸) を含み、 かつ第 2の P T Vと平行 な面 (Y Z平面と平行) に対して非鏡映対称であることから、 電磁場の固有 モードもまた該面に対して非鏡映対称となることによる。 [0061] The eighth invention can be explained by all the bands in the band diagrams shown in Figs. All bands in the band diagrams shown in Fig. 5 and Fig. 8 cannot distinguish between symmetric and antisymmetric modes. This includes any axis (axis parallel to the Z axis in FIG. 2) perpendicular to the plane where P r C and BAS already contain the first and second PTV (XY plane in FIG. 2), and the second Because it is non-mirror-symmetric with respect to a plane parallel to the PTV (parallel to the YZ plane), the eigenmode of the electromagnetic field is also non-mirror-symmetric with respect to the plane.
[0062] 第 9の発明に関しては図 5及び図 8に示されるバンド図中のすべてのバン ドにより説明できる。 また同様に P r C及び B A Sが既に第 1及び第 2の P T Vを含む面 (図 2における X Y平面) と直交する任意の軸 (図 2における Z軸と平行な軸) に対して P r C及び B A Sが既に非回転対称であるので、 電磁場の固有モードもまた該軸に対して非回転対称である。 [0062] The ninth invention can be explained by all the bands in the band diagrams shown in Figs. Similarly, P r C and BAS are in any direction perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second PTV (XY plane in Fig. 2) (axis parallel to the Z axis in Fig. 2). And because BAS is already non-rotation symmetric, the eigenmodes of the electromagnetic field are also non-rotation symmetric about the axis.
[0063] 第 10の発明に関しては、 図 5及び図 8に示されるバンド図中のすべてのバ ンドによリ説明できる。 また同様に P r C及び B A Sが既に第 1及び第 2の P T Vを含む面 (図 2における X Y平面) と直交する任意の軸 (図 2におけ る Z軸と平行な軸) を含み、 かつ第 2の P T Vと平行な面 (Y Z平面と平行 ) に対して非鏡映対称であり、 該軸に対して非回転対称であるので、 電磁場 の固有モードは励振の方位にかかわらず該面に対して非鏡映対称であリ該軸 に対して 3回以上の回転対称性をもたない。 [0063] The tenth invention can be explained by all the bands in the band diagrams shown in Figs. Similarly, P r C and BAS already include an arbitrary axis (axis parallel to the Z axis in FIG. 2) perpendicular to the plane containing the first and second PTVs (the XY plane in FIG. 2), and Since it is non-mirror symmetric with respect to the plane parallel to the second PTV (parallel to the YZ plane) and non-rotationally symmetric with respect to the axis, the eigenmode of the electromagnetic field is not affected by this plane regardless of the direction of excitation. On the other hand, it is non-mirrored and has no rotational symmetry of 3 or more times with respect to the axis.
[0064] 図 6及び図 9に示されるバンド図においても対称モードと反対称モードの 区別ができていないが、 その理由は非特許文献 4および非特許文献 5で述べ られている。 [0064] In the band diagrams shown in FIGS. 6 and 9, the symmetric mode and the antisymmetric mode cannot be distinguished, but the reason is described in Non-Patent Document 4 and Non-Patent Document 5.
[0065] 図 4に示すバンド図には偶対称モード(Even)のバンドと反対称モード (Odd) のバンドが存在し、 図 5に示すバンド図では対称モードのバンドと反対称モ ードのバンドの区別が付かないものの、 両バンド図は各バンドの傾き、 折り 返しの周波数、 バンドギヤップの存在する周波数などにおいてほぼ同一であ る。 そこで図 4における反対称モードのバンドに対応する図 5におけるバン ドを反対称ライクモードのバンドと呼称する。 図 4における偶対称モードの バンドに対応する図 5におけるバンドも同様に偶対称ライクモードのバンド と呼称する。 [0065] The band diagram shown in Fig. 4 has an even symmetric mode (Even) band and an antisymmetric mode (Odd) band. In the band diagram shown in Fig. 5, the symmetric mode band and the antisymmetric mode band exist. Although no distinction can be made between the bands, the two band diagrams are almost identical in terms of the inclination of each band, the frequency of folding, the frequency where the band gap exists, etc. The Therefore, the band in Fig. 5 that corresponds to the band of antisymmetric mode in Fig. 4 is called the band of antisymmetric like mode. The band in Fig. 5 corresponding to the even symmetric mode band in Fig. 4 is also called the even symmetric like mode band.
[0066] 偶対称モードと反対称モードの区別が付かないことは非特許文献 4で述べ られているビームを垂直入射した場合及び斜入射した場合と類似している。 しかしながら、 図 4のバンド図に対して図 5のバンド図を比較した場合と、 図 4のバンド図に対して図 6のバンド図を比較した場合の相違点としては、 図 4でほぼ重なリ合う偶対称モードと反対称モードに対応する図 5の偶対称 ライクモードのバンドと反対称ライクモードのバンドが乖離していく傾向が 見えることと、 図 5の偶対称モードのバンド、 反対称モードのバンドが存在 する周波数近傍で図 6ではバンドギャップが発生するなどバンド構造の著し い変形が認められるが、 図 5ではそのような傾向がみられないことがあげら れる。 [0066] The fact that the even-symmetric mode and the anti-symmetric mode cannot be distinguished is similar to the case where the beam described in Non-Patent Document 4 is perpendicularly incident and obliquely incident. However, the difference between the band diagram of FIG. 5 compared to the band diagram of FIG. 4 and the band diagram of FIG. 6 compared to the band diagram of FIG. The even symmetric like mode band and the antisymmetric like mode band shown in Fig. 5 corresponding to the matching even symmetric mode and antisymmetric mode tend to deviate, and the even symmetric mode band shown in Fig. 5 is antisymmetric. Fig. 6 shows a significant deformation of the band structure, such as the generation of a band gap near the frequency where the mode band exists, but Fig. 5 does not show such a tendency.
[0067] また反対称モードのバンドに対して反対称ライクモードのバンドが存在す るバンド端が周波数にして 7 %程度まで乖離が認められる。 図 2の一つめの P T Vと三つめの P T Vを含む面と二つめの P T Vとがなす角度がさらに小 さい場合は、 周波数の違いはさらに大きくなる。 図 2に類似した P r C及び B A Sでは ±30%程度の乖離が可能である。 [0067] Further, the band edge where the antisymmetric like mode band exists with respect to the antisymmetric mode band has a frequency deviation of about 7%. If the angle between the plane containing the first P T V and the third P T V in Figure 2 and the second P T V is even smaller, the difference in frequency is even greater. For PrC and BAS similar to those in Fig. 2, a deviation of about ± 30% is possible.
[0068] また図 7から図 9に示した T M偏波のバンド図を比較した場合についても 、 図 4から図 6記載の T E偏波の各バンド図を比較した場合とほぼ同傾向を 示している。 [0068] When comparing the TM polarization band diagrams shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the TE polarization band diagrams shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 show almost the same tendency. Yes.
[0069] 3 . 第 1 1から第 15の発明の説明 [0069] 3. Description of the 1st to 15th inventions
以下、 第 1 1から第 15の発明について、 例示的に図面を参照しつつ、 詳細に 説明する。 Hereinafter, the 11th to 15th inventions will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[0070] 前記第 1から第 10の発明による周期構造体 (P h C ) および Zまたは該 P h Cを含むデバイスに 「特定の波長の光 (電磁波) を入射」 した場合、 以下 ( A ) 〜 (R) の現象が生じる。 [0071] (A) 第 1及び第 2の P TVを含む面と平行な面である周期構造体の表面 に入射した電磁波の一部は、 周期構造体内部を第 1及び第 2の P T Vを含む 面と平行な方向に伝搬する (第 11の発明に相当する) 。 [0070] When the light having a specific wavelength (electromagnetic wave) is incident on the periodic structure (P h C) and the device including Z or the P h C according to the first to tenth inventions, the following (A) ~ (R) phenomenon occurs. [0071] (A) A part of the electromagnetic wave incident on the surface of the periodic structure that is parallel to the plane including the first and second PTVs passes through the first and second PTVs inside the periodic structure. Propagates in a direction parallel to the plane (corresponding to the eleventh invention).
( B) 第 1及び第 2の P T Vを含む面と平行な面である周期構造体の表面 に入射した電磁波の一部は、 周期構造体内部で回折光となり、 周期構造体内 部を 「第 1および Z又は第 2の P TVの方向」 および Z又は 「第 1及び第 3 の P TVを含む面と平行な方向」 および Z又は 「第 2及び第 3の P TVを含 む面と平行な方向」 に伝搬する。 (B) Part of the electromagnetic wave incident on the surface of the periodic structure, which is a plane parallel to the plane including the first and second PTVs, becomes diffracted light inside the periodic structure. And Z or direction of the second P TV ”and Z or“ direction parallel to the plane containing the first and third P TV ”and Z or“ parallel to the plane containing the second and third P TV ” Propagating in the direction.
(C) 上記 (B) の回折光は、 周期構造体と一様媒質の界面で全反射、 又 は一部を除いて反射し残りは透過する。 (第 11の発明に相当する) 。 つまり 周期構造体は導波路としての作用も有する。 (C) The diffracted light of (B) above is totally reflected at the interface between the periodic structure and the uniform medium, or is reflected except for a part, and the rest is transmitted. (Corresponds to the eleventh invention). In other words, the periodic structure also functions as a waveguide.
[0072] (D) 周期構造体と一様媒質との界面を透過した上記 (B) の回折光は、 一様媒質と空気 (他の一様媒質) との界面で反射し、 再度周期構造体に入射 する。 [0072] (D) The diffracted light of (B) that has passed through the interface between the periodic structure and the uniform medium is reflected at the interface between the uniform medium and air (another uniform medium), and again the periodic structure. Incident on the body.
(E) 上記 (B) から上記 (D) により、 入射ビームと同一進行方向及び 反射ビームと同一方向に進む複数のビームが得られる (ビームの分岐。 第 12 の発明に相当する) 。 さらに該複数のビームは、 互いにほぼ同一の偏波状態 をもつ。 (E) From (B) to (D) above, a plurality of beams traveling in the same traveling direction as the incident beam and in the same direction as the reflected beam can be obtained (beam splitting, corresponding to the twelfth invention). Further, the plurality of beams have substantially the same polarization state.
[0073] (F) 上記 (A) の光の伝搬方向および上記 (E) の光の分岐方向は、 Γ 第 1の P TVの方向およびその逆方向」 および Z又は 「第 2の P TVの方向 およびその逆方向」 又は 「第 1及び第 2の PTVに対して第 3の PTVを投 影した方向およびその逆方向」 である (第 13の発明に相当する) 。 [0073] (F) The light propagation direction in (A) and the light branching direction in (E) are: Γ direction of first P TV and vice versa, and Z or “second P TV Direction and its opposite direction ”or“ direction in which the third PTV is projected on the first and second PTV and its opposite direction ”(corresponding to the thirteenth invention).
(G) 入射角によって同一方向に伝搬するビームの強度比、 分岐間隔が、 変化する (第 14の発明に相当する) 。 (G) The intensity ratio of the beam propagating in the same direction and the branch interval vary depending on the incident angle (corresponding to the fourteenth invention).
(H) 入射位置によって同一方向に伝搬するビームの強度比が、 変化する (第 14の発明に相当する) 。 (H) The intensity ratio of the beam propagating in the same direction varies depending on the incident position (corresponding to the 14th invention).
( I ) 波長によって同一の入射角、 入射位置における面内の逆方向に伝搬 する 2つビームの分岐間隔が、 おおよそ波長に比例して変化する。 また入射 角度、 入射位置を変化させた場合の分岐された光の強度比も変化する (第 14 の発明に相当する) 。 (I) The branching interval of the two beams propagating in the opposite directions in the plane at the same incident angle and incident position varies with the wavelength approximately in proportion to the wavelength. Also incident The intensity ratio of the branched light when the angle and the incident position are changed also changes (corresponding to the fourteenth invention).
[0074] (J) ビームの分岐間隔は、 面内周期の大きさ、 媒質の屈折率と波長、 基 板材質及び厚さに依存する。 [0074] (J) The beam splitting interval depends on the size of the in-plane period, the refractive index and wavelength of the medium, the substrate material, and the thickness.
(K) 前記特定波長以外では、 ビームの伝搬方向は通常の幾何光学に従う (K) Except for the specific wavelength, the propagation direction of the beam follows normal geometric optics.
(L) 上記 (A) から上記 (J) に記載される伝搬を示す波長は、 図 2に 示す P r Cおよび BASと周期構造体と P r Cの面積又は体積が同一、 かつ おのおのに含まれる 1つの P T Vが同一、 B A Sにおける媒質の種類、 構成 比率が同一、 かつ鏡映対称な図 3に示す P r Cおよび BASによる周期構造 体が有する反対称モードの存在する波長の近傍である (周波数にして 7 %の ずれは存在する。 また、 場合によっては 10%のずれ、 15%のずれ、 20%のず れ、 30O/Oのずれは存在する) (第 15の発明に相当する) 。 (L) The wavelengths indicating propagation described in (A) to (J) above are the same in the area or volume of P r C and BAS, the periodic structure, and P r C shown in Fig. 2, and each included. One PTV is the same, the type of medium in BAS, the composition ratio is the same, and it is in the vicinity of the wavelength where the antisymmetric mode of the periodic structure of P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 3 exists. (There is a deviation of 7% in frequency. In some cases, there is a deviation of 10%, a deviation of 15%, a deviation of 20%, and a deviation of 30O / O) (corresponding to the fifteenth invention) .
(M) 第 1または第 3の PTVの大きさと含まれる媒質のうち最も大きな 屈折率との積は、 上記 (A) から上記 (K) の伝搬が生じる最も長い波長よ リも大きい。 (M) The product of the size of the first or third PTV and the largest refractive index among the contained media is larger than the longest wavelength at which propagation from (A) to (K) occurs.
(N) 上記 (E) 記載の互いに平行に伝搬する複数のビームが発現する範 囲は、 多次元周期構造体の範囲内に限られる。 多次元周期構造の外に上記 ( E) 記載の互いに平行に伝搬する複数のビームは発生しない。 (N) The range in which a plurality of beams propagating in parallel to each other as described in (E) above appears is limited to the range of the multidimensional periodic structure. In addition to the multidimensional periodic structure, the multiple beams propagating parallel to each other described in (E) above are not generated.
(O) 上記 (A) および (B) の伝搬をなす光が、 欠陥や表面の異物など 周期が乱れた個所から漏れ出す。 (O) The light propagating in (A) and (B) above leaks out from the part where the period is disturbed, such as defects and foreign matter on the surface.
(P) 図 3記載の P r Cおよび B ASによる周期構造体に、 反対称モード のバンドが存在する波長の光を斜め入射しても上記 (A) から上記 (J) の 光の伝搬は生じない。 (P) Propagation of light from (A) to (J) above is not possible even if light of a wavelength with an antisymmetric mode is obliquely incident on the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 3. Does not occur.
[0075] 以下に、 上述する光の振る舞いについて、 図面を参照して詳細に説明する 。 基板上に形成した図 2記載の P r C及び BASによる周期構造体に対して 、 偏光方向を選択した平行ビームを入射し、 伝搬を調べた結果を示す。 Hereinafter, the above-described behavior of light will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 2 shows the result of investigating the propagation by entering a parallel beam with a selected polarization direction into the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in FIG. 2 formed on the substrate.
[0076] 図 10は、 前記の基板上に形成された 「AC-2DPhC」 1001の中心部に波長 532nm のレーザー光によるガウス型の強度分布を有する平行ビームを垂直入射した ときの出射光の伝搬を示す図である。 図 10 ( a )は側面図、 図 10 ( b )は正面図 である。 FIG. 10 shows a wavelength of 532 nm at the center of “AC-2DPhC” 1001 formed on the substrate. It is a figure which shows propagation | transmission of the emitted light when the parallel beam which has a Gaussian intensity distribution by the laser beam of normal incidence is carried out. Fig. 10 (a) is a side view and Fig. 10 (b) is a front view.
[0077] AC-2DPhC 1001は厚さ 0. 5 の溶融石英基板 1002の上に積層されており Y 軸方向については一様 (1周期) である。 また同時に 1次元 (平面) 多層膜 1 003も基板 1002の上に積層されている。 図中、 符号 1004は入射平行ビームを示 し、 符号 1005〜1014は出力ビームを示す。 同様に符号 1015は 「AC-2DPhC 100 1における入射平行ビーム 1004の入射位置および出射位置、 符号 1016及び 1017 は 「AC-2DPhC 1001における出射ビームの出射位置を示す。 符号 1018は、 ΓΑ C-2DPhCj 1001中に存在する欠陥領域、 符号 1019は 1次元多層膜部分の表層に 塗布された散乱体を表す。 [0077] AC-2DPhC 1001 is laminated on a 0.5-thick fused quartz substrate 1002, and is uniform (one period) in the Y-axis direction. At the same time, a one-dimensional (planar) multilayer film 1003 is also laminated on the substrate 1002. In the figure, reference numeral 1004 indicates an incident parallel beam, and reference numerals 1005 to 1014 indicate output beams. Similarly, reference numeral 1015 denotes “incident position and outgoing position of the incident parallel beam 1004 in AC-2DPhC 1001, and reference numerals 1016 and 1017 denote“ exit position of outgoing beam in AC-2DPhC 1001. Reference numeral 1018 denotes ΓΑ C-2DPhCj Defect region existing in 1001, reference numeral 1019 represents a scatterer applied to the surface layer of the one-dimensional multilayer film portion.
[0078] まず、 図 10に示すように、 スネルの法則に従う透過光と前記透過光と進行 方向が平行な 2つのビームが確認された。 また反射側に伝搬する光について も反射の法則に従う反射光と前記反射光と進行方向が平行な 2つのビームが 確認された。 なおビームの出射位置は多次元周期構造の範囲に限定され、 同 一方向に伝搬する 3つのビームの間隔は 2. 0m mで同一であった。 First, as shown in FIG. 10, transmitted light in accordance with Snell's law and two beams in which the transmitted light and the traveling direction are parallel were confirmed. As for the light propagating to the reflection side, the reflected light in accordance with the law of reflection and the two beams whose traveling direction was parallel to the reflected light were confirmed. The beam emission position was limited to the range of the multidimensional periodic structure, and the interval between the three beams propagating in the same direction was the same at 2.0 mm.
[0079] また T E、 T M、 電界振動方向が T E偏波に対して 45度傾いた直線偏波の 各偏波を入れた場合、 いずれにおいても同様の振る舞いが確認された。 さら に出力ビーム 1008、 1009、 1010はほぼ同一の偏波状態をもつことも確認され [0079] In addition, the same behavior was confirmed in all cases where T E, T M, and electric field oscillation directions were each linearly polarized waves inclined by 45 degrees with respect to T E polarized waves. Furthermore, it was confirmed that the output beams 1008, 1009, and 1010 have almost the same polarization state.
[0080] 次に、 ビームの入射位置を 「AC-2DPhC」 1001の X方向の端部付近にしたと ころ 「AC-2DPhC」 1001の存在する範囲からのみ 4つのビームが出射し、 かつ 4つのビームの間隔は図 10の場合と同一であることを確認した。 また入射位 置によって、 ビームの強度比を変化させることができ、 特に出力ビーム 1009 より出力ビーム 1008の強度を大きくできることを確認した。 [0080] Next, when the incident position of the beam is near the end in the X direction of “AC-2DPhC” 1001, four beams are emitted only from the range where “AC-2DPhC” 1001 exists, and four The beam spacing was confirmed to be the same as in Fig. 10. It was also confirmed that the beam intensity ratio can be changed depending on the incident position, and in particular that the intensity of the output beam 1008 can be made larger than that of the output beam 1009.
[0081 ] また AC-2DPhC面の荒れ (欠陥領域 1018) によって散乱する光が存在し、 か つ 「AC-2DPhC」 1001と同時に積層された 1次元多層膜 1003の端面の前記 3つ の出射ビームの出射位置の並ぶ延長線上の位置から出力ビーム 101 1〜出力ビ ーム 1014がビームとして出力したことから、 薄膜面内を光が伝播することが 確認できた。 さらに、 1次元多層膜部分の表層に散乱体 1019を塗布したとこ ろ、 散乱体 1019からの光の漏れも確認された。 [0081] In addition, there is light scattered by the roughness of the AC-2DPhC surface (defect region 1018), and the three outgoing beams on the end face of the one-dimensional multilayer film 1003 laminated simultaneously with the "AC-2DPhC" 1001 Output beam 101 1 to output beam from the position on the extended line where Since the beam 1014 was output as a beam, it was confirmed that light propagated in the thin film surface. Furthermore, when scatterer 1019 was applied to the surface layer of the one-dimensional multilayer film portion, light leakage from scatterer 1019 was also confirmed.
[0082] ついで、 基板 1002と種々の厚さの石英板を、 屈折率マッチングオイルを介 して光学的には一体として見なせるよう接続したところ、 出力ビーム 1008と 1 009の間隔が変化した。 [0082] Next, when the substrate 1002 and quartz plates of various thicknesses were connected so as to be optically integrated through refractive index matching oil, the distance between the output beams 1008 and 10009 changed.
[0083] 図 1 1は、 前記の基板上に形成された 「AC-2DPhC」 1001と、 「AC-2DPhC」 100 1の中心部に波長 532nmのレーザー光によるガウス型の強度分布を有する平行 ビームを小さな入射角をもって斜入射したときの出射光の伝搬を示す図であ る。 入射面は Z X平面と平行である。 図 1 1 ( a )は側面図、 図 1 1 ( b )は正面図 である。 [0083] Fig. 1 1 shows "AC-2DPhC" 1001 formed on the substrate and a parallel beam having a Gaussian intensity distribution with a laser beam having a wavelength of 532 nm at the center of "AC-2DPhC" 1001. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the propagation of outgoing light when the light beam is obliquely incident with a small incident angle. The incident surface is parallel to the Z X plane. Fig. 11 (a) is a side view and Fig. 11 (b) is a front view.
[0084] 図中、 符号 1 101は入射平行ビームを示し、 符号 1 102〜1 107は出力ビームを 示す。 同様に符号 1 108は 「AC-2DPhC」 1001における入射平行ビームの入射位 置および出射位置、 符号 1 109及び符号 1 1 10は 「AC-2DPhC」 1001における出射 ビームの出射位置を示す。 In the figure, reference numeral 1101 denotes an incident parallel beam, and reference numerals 1102 to 1107 denote output beams. Similarly, reference numeral 1108 denotes the incident position and outgoing position of the incident parallel beam in “AC-2DPhC” 1001, and reference numerals 1 109 and 1 110 denote the outgoing position of the outgoing beam in “AC-2DPhC” 1001.
[0085] 図 1 1に示す例では、 透過側に伝搬する光の分岐間隔については垂直入射時 を最大に入射角によって変化した。 また反射側に伝搬するビームの進行方向 は幾何光学における反射の法則で示される方向と同一であった。 さらに透過 側、 反射側のいずれについても入射角を変化させることで同一方向に伝搬す るビームの強度比を変化させることが可能であった。 [0085] In the example shown in Fig. 11, the branching interval of the light propagating to the transmission side changes with the incident angle to the maximum at the time of vertical incidence. The traveling direction of the beam propagating to the reflection side was the same as the direction indicated by the law of reflection in geometric optics. Furthermore, it was possible to change the intensity ratio of the beam propagating in the same direction by changing the incident angle on both the transmission side and the reflection side.
[0086] また図 1 1の場合よリも入射角を大きくすると透過側及び反射側に伝搬する ビームが各々 2つに減少した。 さらに入射角を大きくするとビームが 1つに なる場合もあった。 さらに入射する方向を変えてみた (X軸の周りで回転さ せる) ところ、 同じくビームの分岐が生じ、 反射側に伝搬するビームの進行 方向は、 幾何光学における反射の法則で示される方向と同一であった。 また 入射角によって透過光と反射光の比率を変更できることを確認した。 [0086] Further, as compared with the case of FIG. 11, when the incident angle was increased, the number of beams propagating to the transmission side and the reflection side decreased to two. Furthermore, when the incident angle was increased, there was a case where the beam became one. When the incident direction was further changed (rotated around the X axis), the same beam splitting occurred, and the traveling direction of the beam propagating to the reflection side was the same as the direction indicated by the reflection law in geometric optics. Met. It was also confirmed that the ratio of transmitted light and reflected light can be changed by the incident angle.
[0087] ついで入射光の波長を変えてみたところ、 波長 473nmの平行ビームのレーザ 一光を入射した場合であっても、 図 10における波長 532nmと同様の振る舞いを した。 ただし、 波長 473nmの場合、 垂直入射時のビームの分岐間隔は 1 . 4mmで 減少していた。 さらに短波長の波長 405nmでは垂直入射時のビームの分岐間隔 は、 1 . 0mm程度になった。 さらに波長 650nmにおいては入射平行ビームの伝搬 は、 通常のスネルの法則、 反射の法則に従うことが確認された。 [0087] Next, when the wavelength of the incident light was changed, even when a parallel laser beam with a wavelength of 473 nm was incident, the behavior similar to that at the wavelength of 532 nm in Fig. 10 was observed. did. However, when the wavelength was 473 nm, the beam separation interval at normal incidence was reduced to 1.4 mm. In addition, at a short wavelength of 405 nm, the beam separation interval at normal incidence was about 1.0 mm. Furthermore, at a wavelength of 650 nm, it was confirmed that the propagation of the incident parallel beam follows the usual Snell's law and the reflection law.
[0088] 以上のように、 同一入射角におけるビームの分岐間隔は、 ある所定の波長 までは 1次関数の関係になる。 また 532nmでは通常の幾何光学に従うビームと 分岐光の比率が T E偏波を入射した場合の方が T M偏波を入射した場合に比 ベて小さく (分岐光が多く) 、 473nmでは通常の幾何光学に従うビームと分岐 光の比率が T E偏波を入射した場合の方が T M偏波を入射した場合に比べて 大きい (分岐光が少ない) ことを確認した。 分岐自体は T E、 T Mの両偏波 で生じるが、 分岐光強度は偏波によって異なり、 かつ通常の幾何光学に従う ビームと分岐光の比率も波長に依存する。 なお出力ビーム 101 1と出力ビーム 1 013の間になす角度も波長によって変化した。 As described above, the beam splitting interval at the same incident angle has a linear function relationship up to a predetermined wavelength. At 532 nm, the ratio of the beam that follows normal geometric optics to the branched light is smaller when TE polarized light is incident than when TM polarized light is incident (more branched light), and at 473 nm, the normal geometric optics is used. It was confirmed that the ratio of the beam following the beam to the branched light was larger (with less branched light) when the TE polarized light was incident than when the TM polarized light was incident. The branching itself occurs with both T E and T M polarizations, but the intensity of the branching light varies depending on the polarization, and the ratio of the beam and the branching light according to ordinary geometrical optics also depends on the wavelength. The angle formed between the output beam 101 1 and the output beam 1 013 also changed depending on the wavelength.
[0089] またビーム直径 3隱、 波長 473nmの平行ビームのレーザー光を入射した場合 、 分岐されたビームが重なって干渉パターンが確認された。 [0089] Further, when a parallel laser beam having a beam diameter of 3 mm and a wavelength of 473 nm was incident, the branched beams overlapped to confirm an interference pattern.
[0090] 図 12は、 基板 1202上に形成された 「AC-2DPhC」 1201と、 「AC-2DPhC」 1201 に波長 532nmのレーザー光によるガウス型の強度分布を有する平行ビームを垂 直入射したときの出射光の伝搬を示す図である。 図 12 ( a )は側面図、 図 12 ( b )は正面図である。 [0090] FIG. 12 shows a case where a parallel beam having a Gaussian intensity distribution by a laser beam having a wavelength of 532 nm is vertically incident on “AC-2DPhC” 1201 formed on a substrate 1202 and “AC-2DPhC” 1201. It is a figure which shows propagation of the emitted light. Fig. 12 (a) is a side view and Fig. 12 (b) is a front view.
[0091 ] 図中、 符号 1203は 「AC-2DPhC」 1201と媒質が連続する平面多層膜であり、 符号 1204は入射平行ビームを示し、 符号 1205〜1215は出力ビームを示す。 符 号 1216は 「AC-2DPhC」 1201における入射平行ビームの入射位置および出射位 置、 符号 1217及び符号 1218は 「AC-2DPhC」 1201における出射ビームの出射位 置を示す。 「AC-2DPhC」 1201は、 「AC-2DPhC」 1001の一部を劈開したもので める。 In the figure, reference numeral 1203 denotes a planar multilayer film in which the medium is continuous with “AC-2DPhC” 1201, reference numeral 1204 denotes an incident parallel beam, and reference numerals 1205 to 1215 denote output beams. Reference numeral 1216 indicates the incident position and exit position of the incident parallel beam in “AC-2DPhC” 1201, and reference numerals 1217 and 1218 indicate the exit position of the exit beam in “AC-2DPhC” 1201. “AC-2DPhC” 1201 should be a part of “AC-2DPhC” 1001 cleaved.
[0092] 図 12に示すように、 AC-2DPhCの一部を劈開し、 図 10と同様に平行ビームを 入射したところ、 図 10に示す出力ビーム 101 1および 1013よリも強い出力ビー ム 121 1、 1213および 1215が劈開した端面から出力し、 かつ出力ビーム 1205は 出力ビーム 1005に比べ強度が低いことが確認された。 同様に出力ビーム 1208 は出力ビーム 1008に比べ強度が低いことが確認された。 また入射位置を X方 向で変えると劈開した端面からの光の漏れ光強度が変化すること、 漏れ光の ビームの強度比が変化することを確認した。 この結果から、 1次元多層膜部 が面内伝搬光に対する弱い光閉じこめ機構として作用していることがわかる 。 また劈開した端面外の空間 (一様) もわずかに光閉じこめ機構となること がわかる。 [0092] As shown in FIG. 12, when a part of AC-2DPhC was cleaved and a parallel beam was incident as in FIG. 10, the output beam 1011 and 1013 shown in FIG. 1, 1213 and 1215 output from the cleaved end face, and output beam 1205 is It was confirmed that the intensity was lower than that of the output beam 1005. Similarly, it was confirmed that the intensity of the output beam 1208 was lower than that of the output beam 1008. It was also confirmed that when the incident position was changed in the X direction, the light leakage intensity from the cleaved end face changed, and the intensity ratio of the leakage light beam changed. From this result, it can be seen that the one-dimensional multilayer film part acts as a weak light confinement mechanism for in-plane propagation light. It can also be seen that the space (uniform) outside the cleaved end face also becomes a light confinement mechanism.
[0093] さらに X方向の周期が 500nmで、 水素化アモルファスシリコン (以下、 「a- S H」 ) と二酸化珪素 (以下、 「S i 02」 ) による図 1と同等の AC-2DPhCを用い て、 中心のビームについて透過光と反射光の和を測定したところ、 そのディ ップの生じる波長が同一膜構成で垂直成長の P h Cにおける反対称モードの バンドの影響が存在する波長と同じであることが確認された。 なお波長可変 レーザーを用いる必要があるため、 a-S Hと S i 02による図 1と同等の AC-2DPhC を用いた。 [0093] Furthermore, using an AC-2DPhC equivalent to Fig. 1 with a hydrogenated amorphous silicon (hereinafter “a-SH”) and silicon dioxide (hereinafter “S i 0 2 ”) having a period in the X direction of 500 nm. When the sum of the transmitted light and reflected light was measured for the central beam, the wavelength produced by the dip was the same as the wavelength at which the influence of the band of the antisymmetric mode in the vertically grown PhC exists in the same film configuration. It was confirmed that there was. Note it is necessary to use a tunable laser, using 1 equivalent of AC-2DPhC by aS H and S i 0 2.
[0094] 図 13は、 図 12に示す基板 1202上に形成された 「AC-2DPhC」 1201に波長 532nm のレーザー光によるガウス型の強度分布を有する平行ビームを垂直入射した ときの出射光の伝搬を示す図である。 図 13 ( a )は正面図、 図 13 ( b )は側面図 である。 [0094] Figure 13 shows the propagation of the emitted light when a parallel beam with a Gaussian intensity distribution by a laser beam with a wavelength of 532 nm is vertically incident on the "AC-2DPhC" 1201 formed on the substrate 1202 shown in Figure 12 FIG. Fig. 13 (a) is a front view and Fig. 13 (b) is a side view.
[0095] 図中、 符号 1301は入射平行ビームを示し、 符号 1302〜1305は薄膜面内を伝 搬する光を示し、 符号 1306〜1308は出力ビームを示す。 なお図 13には特徴的 な光の伝搬のみ記載している。 図 13のように劈開した端面から光を入射する ことを試みたところ、 以下の事柄が確認できた。 In the figure, reference numeral 1301 denotes an incident parallel beam, reference numerals 1302 to 1305 denote light transmitted in the thin film surface, and reference numerals 1306 to 1308 denote output beams. Fig. 13 shows only characteristic light propagation. When we tried to make light incident from the cleaved end face as shown in Fig. 13, we confirmed the following.
第 1に薄膜面内を光が伝搬する。 First, light propagates in the thin film plane.
第 2に AC-2DPhCと 1次元多層膜部の境界で反射する。 Second, it reflects off the boundary between AC-2DPhC and the one-dimensional multilayer.
第 3に Z方向に光が漏れ出す。 Third, light leaks in the Z direction.
[0096] また図 2記載の P r Cと B A Sと相似形であり、 一つめの P T Vが 350nmの P r Cと B A Sからなる AC-2DPhCを厚さ 0. 5mmの溶融石英基板上に形成し、 垂 直入射時の光の分岐を評価したところ、 波長 405nmで分岐間隔 1 . 7隱が確認さ れたが、 波長 473nm、 532nm、 660nmのいずれでも分岐は確認できなかった。 [0096] Also, the Pr C and BAS shown in Fig. 2 are similar, and the first PTV is made of AC-2DPhC consisting of 350 nm of P r C and BAS on a fused silica substrate with a thickness of 0.5 mm. As a result of evaluating the branching of light at normal incidence, a branching interval of 1.7 mm was confirmed at a wavelength of 405 nm. However, no branching was observed at any of the wavelengths 473 nm, 532 nm, and 660 nm.
[0097] 以下、 図を用いて図 10から図 13に示した光の伝搬を説明する。 Hereinafter, the light propagation shown in FIGS. 10 to 13 will be described with reference to the drawings.
図 14は図 10記載の基板 1002上に形成された 「AC-2DPhC」 1001、 1次元多層 膜 1003および空気の間での光の伝搬を拡大して表記したモデル図である。 図 中の符号 1401は AC-2DPhC、 符号 1402は石英基板、 符号 1403は 1次元多層膜、 符号 1404は入射光、 符号 1405〜1423はそれぞれ光線を表す。 FIG. 14 is a model diagram in which light propagation between the “AC-2DPhC” 1001, the one-dimensional multilayer film 1003 and the air formed on the substrate 1002 shown in FIG. 10 is enlarged. In the figure, reference numeral 1401 represents AC-2DPhC, reference numeral 1402 represents a quartz substrate, reference numeral 1403 represents a one-dimensional multilayer film, reference numeral 1404 represents incident light, and reference numerals 1405 to 1423 represent light rays.
[0098] 空気中から入射した光線 1404は、 「AC-2DPhC1401」 内部で 1次回折光 1405 〜1408、 スネルの法則に従う光線 1409、 「AC-2DPhC」 1401の膜と平行に伝搬 する光線 141 1〜1412、 不図示の反射光に分岐される。 [0098] Light ray 1404 incident from the air is the first-order diffracted light 1405 to 1408, light ray 1409 following Snell's law inside AC-2DPhC1401, and light ray propagating parallel to the film of AC-2DPhC 1401 141 1 to 1412, branched to reflected light (not shown).
1次回折光である光線 1405は 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と空気との界面で全反射し 、 ついで 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と基板 1402との界面に入射する。 この界面では反 射光と透過光 1416に分岐される。 The first-order diffracted light beam 1405 is totally reflected at the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and air, and then enters the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and substrate 1402. At this interface, it is branched into reflected light and transmitted light 1416.
同じく 1次回折光である光線 1406は 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と基板 1402との界面 に入射し、 反射光の光線 1414と透過光の光線 1415に分岐される。 Similarly, the first-order diffracted light beam 1406 enters the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and the substrate 1402, and is split into reflected light beam 1414 and transmitted light beam 1415.
同じく 1次回折光である光線 1407は 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と空気との界面で全 反射し、 ついで 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と 1次元多層膜 1403との界面に入射する。 この界面では反射光 1419と透過光 1420に分岐される。 Similarly, the first-order diffracted light beam 1407 is totally reflected at the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and air, and then enters the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403. At this interface, the light is branched into reflected light 1419 and transmitted light 1420.
また 「AC-2DPhC」 1401の膜と平行 (X軸と平行方向) に伝搬する光線 1412 は 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と 1次元多層膜 1403との界面に入射し、 一部は透過する 。 なお、 光線 1415の出力が望ましくない場合は、 以下の方法で出力を小さく できる In addition, light 1412 propagating parallel to the AC-2DPhC 1401 film (in the direction parallel to the X axis) is incident on the interface between AC-2DPhC 1401 and the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403, and part of it is transmitted. If the output of ray 1415 is not desirable, the output can be reduced by the following method.
■ AC-2DPhCの実効屈折率が高くなるようにする。 ■ Increase the effective refractive index of AC-2DPhC.
■基板に金属材料を用いる。 または基板と周期構造体の間に金属層を介する ■ Metal material is used for the substrate. Or through a metal layer between the substrate and the periodic structure
■屈折率の小さい材料を基板として用いる。 (3) A material having a low refractive index is used as the substrate.
[0099] 図 15は図 14記載の基板 1402上に形成された 「AC-2DPhC」 1401、 1次元多層 膜 1403および空気の間での光の伝搬を拡大して表記したモデル図である。 図 中の符号 1501〜1502、 1504〜1509及び 151 1はそれぞれ光線を表し、 符号 1503 は 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と基板 1402の界面、 符号 1510は基板 1402と 1次元多層膜 1 403の界面を表す。 FIG. 15 is a model diagram in which the propagation of light between the “AC-2DPhC” 1401, the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403 and the air formed on the substrate 1402 shown in FIG. 14 is enlarged. In the figure, reference numerals 1501 to 1502, 1504 to 1509, and 151 1 denote light beams, respectively. Is the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and substrate 1402, and reference numeral 1510 is the interface between substrate 1402 and one-dimensional multilayer film 1 403.
「AC-2DPhC」 1401と基板 1402の界面を透過した光線 1415は、 基板 1402と空 気の界面に入射し全反射する。 ついで再度 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と基板 1402の界 面に入射し、 一部は 「AC-2DPhC」 1401内に透過し、 相反性の要求に従い光線 1 504と 1505を生じさせる。 これが前記の分岐光の発生過程である。 “AC-2DPhC” The light 1415 transmitted through the interface between the substrate 1401 and the substrate 1402 enters the interface between the substrate 1402 and the air and is totally reflected. Then, it is incident again on the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and the substrate 1402, and part of it is transmitted into “AC-2DPhC” 1401 to generate rays 1 504 and 1505 in accordance with reciprocity requirements. This is the process of generating the branched light.
一方、 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と基板 1402の界面を透過した光線 1423は基板 1402 と空気の界面に入射し全反射する。 ついで 1次元多層膜 1403と基板 1402の界 面に入射し全反射する。 そのため光線 1423は基板 1402中に閉じこめられる。 On the other hand, the light 1423 transmitted through the interface between “AC-2DPhC” 1401 and the substrate 1402 enters the interface between the substrate 1402 and the air and is totally reflected. Next, the light enters the interface between the one-dimensional multilayer film 1403 and the substrate 1402 and is totally reflected. Therefore, the light beam 1423 is confined in the substrate 1402.
[0100] 以下、 前述の光の伝搬の波長依存性についてバンド構造との関係を説明す る。 [0100] Hereinafter, the relationship between the wavelength dependence of the light propagation and the band structure will be described.
前述した光の伝搬の波長依存性からすると、 図 4の反対称モードの第 2バ ンドに対応する図 5の反対称ライクモードの第 2バンドでは面内への伝搬な どが生じるが図 4の反対称モードの第 1バンドに対応する図 5の反対称ライ クモードの第 1バンドでは均質媒質によるバルクの平板と同様の伝搬を生じ させる。 図 5では反対称ライクモードの第 1バンドが存在する波長近傍のバ ンド構造は図 4の反対称モードの第 1バンドが存在する波長近傍のバンド構 造と傾き及び波長がさほど変わらず、 反対称ライクモードの第 1バンドが存 在する波長近傍のバンド構造は垂直成長の反対称モードの第 2バンドが存在 する波長近傍のバンド構造は大きく乖離していることから図 1の構成では反 対称ライクモードの第 2バンドまたはよリ高次の反対称ライクモードのバン ドが存在する波長で後述する光の伝搬をなすと結論付ける。 From the wavelength dependence of light propagation described above, in-plane propagation occurs in the second band of antisymmetric like mode in Fig. 5 corresponding to the second band of antisymmetric mode in Fig. 4. In the first band of the antisymmetric like mode in Fig. 5, which corresponds to the first band of the antisymmetric mode, the same propagation as that of the bulk plate made of a homogeneous medium occurs. In Fig. 5, the band structure near the wavelength where the first band of antisymmetric like mode exists is the same as the band structure near the wavelength where the first band of antisymmetric mode exists in Fig. 4. The band structure in the vicinity of the wavelength where the first band of the like-like mode exists has a large deviation from the band structure in the vicinity of the wavelength where the second band of the anti-symmetric mode of vertical growth exists. We conclude that the second mode of like mode or higher-order antisymmetric like mode band propagates light as described below at the wavelength where it exists.
[0101 ] 上述した光の伝搬と従来の回折格子との相違を説明する。 [0101] The difference between the above-described light propagation and the conventional diffraction grating will be described.
従来の回折格子には I s i n 0 | > 1 ( 0は回折角) の条件を満たす回折光が 、 回折格子表面 (回折格子と空気の界面) に近接場光として局在する現象が 知られている。 In conventional diffraction gratings, it is known that diffracted light that satisfies the condition I sin 0 |> 1 (0 is the diffraction angle) is localized as near-field light on the diffraction grating surface (interface between the diffraction grating and air). Yes.
本発明は、 界面ではなく、 P h C内部を伝搬光として伝搬することが異な る。 [0102] 図 16は、 AC-PhCにおける PTVが全て直交する P r Cと媒質の分布が偏つ た B ASのモデルを示す図である。 図 16(a)は P r Cを示す図であり、 一つ めの P T V1601は X方向と平行で長さが 410nmであり、 二つめの P T V1602 は Z方向に対して平行で長さが 250n mである。 三つめの P T Vは Y軸と平行 であり、 長さは任意 (不定) である。 符号 1603〜1606は格子点である。 図 16( b)は B ASを示す図であり、 ZX平面と平行な面での断面図である。 BAS は、 n =2.4の媒質が占める領域 1607と n =1.5の媒質が占める領域 1608およ び領域 1609とからなる。 ただし周期構造体としては領域 1608と領域 1609とは 連続しており、 BASは実質的に 2つの領域からなる。 The present invention is different in that it propagates as propagating light not inside the interface but inside P h C. [0102] Fig. 16 is a diagram showing a model of BAS in which the distribution of P r C and the medium distribution of PTV in AC-PhC are all orthogonal to each other. Fig. 16 (a) is a graph showing P r C. The first PT V1601 is parallel to the X direction and has a length of 410 nm, and the second PT V1602 is parallel to the Z direction and has a length of 410 nm. 250 nm. The third PTV is parallel to the Y axis and the length is arbitrary (undefined). Reference numerals 1603 to 1606 denote lattice points. FIG. 16 (b) is a diagram showing the BAS, which is a cross-sectional view in a plane parallel to the ZX plane. The BAS consists of a region 1607 occupied by a medium with n = 2.4, a region 1608 and a region 1609 occupied by a medium with n = 1.5. However, as a periodic structure, region 1608 and region 1609 are continuous, and BAS is essentially composed of two regions.
[0103] 第 1から第 10の発明に該当する周期構造体は、 図 2に示す P r C及び BA Sによる周期構造体に限らない。 一般的に、 図 16に示す P r C及び BASま たは図 16に示す P r C及び BASを 3次元に拡張したによる周期構造体もま た第 1から第 10に該当する周期構造体である。 なお P T Vが全て直交する場 合、 該当する周期構造体は媒質の分布が偏った B ASによる場合に限られる 。 図 16に示す P r Cと B ASによる周期構造体のバンド構造は、 図 2に示す P r Cと BASによる周期構造体のバンド構造と類似する。 [0103] The periodic structure corresponding to the first to tenth inventions is not limited to the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in FIG. In general, P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 16 or P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 16 are three-dimensionally extended and the periodic structure corresponding to the first to tenth is also used. is there. When all P TV are orthogonal, the corresponding periodic structure is limited to BAS with a biased medium distribution. The band structure of the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 16 is similar to the band structure of the periodic structure of PrC and BAS shown in Fig. 2.
[0104] ここで P h Cと原子の周期配列による結晶の P r C及び B ASの違いにつ いて補足する。 上記で示したように P h Cは P r Cの形状、 BASの自由度 が大きい。 このような特徴は原子の周期配列による結晶と P h Cの間で大き く異なる点であるといえる。 P r Cに関して原子の周期配列による結晶では 基本的に 3次元構造にならざるを得ず、 P h Cのように 2次元周期構造体と することは困難であり、 P r Cの形状についても同様である。 [0104] Here, we will supplement the difference between P h C and P r C and B AS of crystals due to the periodic arrangement of atoms. As shown above, P h C has a shape of P r C and a large degree of freedom in BAS. Such features can be said to be greatly different between crystals based on periodic arrangement of atoms and P h C. In terms of P r C, crystals with a periodic arrangement of atoms basically have a three-dimensional structure, and it is difficult to make a two-dimensional periodic structure like P h C. It is the same.
[0105] B ASについては、 原子の周期配列による結晶では電子の軌道によって制 限されるのに対し、 P h Cでは構成媒質自体が形状を保持するため、 製造ェ 程さえ満たせば基本的に制限はない。 [0105] BAS is limited by the electron's orbit in crystals with a periodic arrangement of atoms, whereas in P h C, the constituent medium itself retains its shape, so basically only if it meets the manufacturing process. There is no limit.
[0106] また周期構造体の外観上の相違として、 前記の光の伝搬を示す周期構造体 については宝石のオパールにみられる遊色効果(play of color)に類似した色 むらのある外観であるのに対し、 非特許文献 4に記載する周期構造体は透過 反射スぺクトルを反映した着色があるものの均一な外観 (半透明の色つきガ ラスに似る) であった。 [0106] Further, as a difference in appearance of the periodic structure, the periodic structure showing the light propagation has an uneven appearance similar to the play of color seen in gem opal. In contrast, the periodic structure described in Non-Patent Document 4 is transparent. It had a uniform appearance (similar to translucent colored glass), although it had a color reflecting the reflection spectrum.
[0107] ここまでで第 11から第 15の発明によるところの周期構造体がもつ電磁波の 伝搬の特殊性も明らかになった。 そこで前記 (A) から (J ) の光の伝搬を まとめて H型伝搬と呼称することとする。 また H型伝搬の中でも個別の事項 を指すとき、 たとえば前記 (A) を指すときは H型伝搬 (A) と略記する。 [0107] So far, the propagation characteristics of the electromagnetic waves of the periodic structures according to the eleventh to fifteenth inventions have also been clarified. Therefore, the propagation of light from (A) to (J) is collectively referred to as H-type propagation. Also, when referring to individual items in H-type propagation, for example, when referring to (A) above, it is abbreviated as H-type propagation (A).
[0108] さらに上記第 1から第 15の発明について、 次の補助技術を付加してもよい 。 既に述べたように、 第 1から第 7の発明に係る周期構造体であれば、 前記 H型伝搬 (A) 〜H型伝搬 (D ) に記載する光の伝搬が生じる。 前記 (L ) に示したように、 鏡映面を有する類似構造の反対称モードと近縁性があり、 前記反対称モードのバンドの存在する波長を制御することが前記 H型伝搬 ( A) 〜H型伝搬 (D ) に記載する光の伝搬が生じる波長を制御する手段とな る。 [0108] Further, the following assistive technology may be added to the first to fifteenth inventions. As already described, in the periodic structure according to the first to seventh inventions, the light propagation described in H type propagation (A) to H type propagation (D) occurs. As shown in (L), there is a close relationship with the antisymmetric mode of a similar structure having a mirror surface, and controlling the wavelength in which the band of the antisymmetric mode exists can control the H-type propagation (A) ~ A means to control the wavelength at which the light propagation described in H type propagation (D) occurs.
[0109] これを受けて、 図 3と同等の P r C及び B A Sによる P h Cにおいて 「反 対称モードのバンドが存在する波長帯域の拡張方法」 を検討した。 反対称モ 一ドのバンドが存在する波長は以下の 2点が支配的であり、 P r Cにおける 他のパラメータの影響は小さいことが既に知られている (非特許文献 6を参 照) 。 [0109] In response to this, we examined “a method of extending the wavelength band in which anti-symmetric mode bands exist” in P h C by PrC and BAS equivalent to those in FIG. It is already known that the following two points dominate the wavelength where the band of antisymmetric mode exists, and the influence of other parameters on P r C is small (see Non-Patent Document 6).
( 1 ) 入射方向と直交又はそれに近い角度をもつ P T Vの長さ (AC-PhCにお いては基板上に形成されて凹凸の周期) (1) PTV length perpendicular to or near the incident direction (in AC-PhC, the period of irregularities formed on the substrate)
( 2 ) 用いる媒質の屈折率と充填比率 (実効屈折率) (2) Refractive index and filling ratio of medium used (effective refractive index)
[0110] 以上をふまえて、 シミュレーションを行ったところ、 一般に複雑な構成の P r C又は B A S中の屈折率の分布を有する周期構造体が反対称モードのバ ンドが存在する波長帯域の拡張には有利であることがわかった。 [0110] Based on the above, a simulation was performed. In general, a periodic structure with a refractive index distribution in PrC or BAS with a complicated configuration is used to extend the wavelength band where the band of antisymmetric mode exists. Was found to be advantageous.
[0111 ] 以下、 波長帯域の拡張に特に有効な方法を図面を参照しつつ列記する。 [0111] In the following, particularly effective methods for expanding the wavelength band are listed with reference to the drawings.
第 1の有効な方法として、 3次元 P h Cを用いる。 離散的並進対称性を有 する方向と周期の大きさの存在数が多いほど反対称モードのバンドが存在す る波長が増えるため、 3次元 P h Cは 2次元 P h Cに比べ有利である。 特に P T Vの長さが各々異なることが望ましい。 As the first effective method, 3D P h C is used. 3D P h C is more advantageous than 2D P h C because the number of anti-symmetric mode bands increases as the number of directions with discrete translational symmetry and period size increases. . In particular It is desirable that each PTV has a different length.
[0112] 第 2の有効な方法として、 3種類以上の屈折率を有する媒質を含まれてい る B A Sを用いる。 この手段は、 用いる媒質を 3種類以上にすることや製造 条件を適切に設定することで実現できる。 [0112] As a second effective method, B AS including a medium having three or more kinds of refractive indexes is used. This means can be realized by using three or more types of media and setting the manufacturing conditions appropriately.
[0113] 第 3の有効な方法として、 屈折率の変調が光進行方向に 2回以上存在する[0113] As a third effective method, refractive index modulation exists twice or more in the light traveling direction.
B A Sを用いる。 Use B A S.
[0114] 例えば、 図 1における領域 114、 116、 118、 120、 122を n =3. 4の媒質に変 更すれば、 屈折率の変調が 2回存在することになる。 また、 AC-PhCの P r C と B A Sであることから第 1から第 10の発明に容易に対応できる。 [0114] For example, if the regions 114, 116, 118, 120, and 122 in Fig. 1 are changed to a medium of n = 3.4, the refractive index modulation exists twice. In addition, since it is Pr C and B AS of AC-PhC, it can easily cope with the first to tenth inventions.
[0115] または例えば、 図 1における領域 114、 116、 118、 120、 122の厚さを、 領域 [0115] Or, for example, the thickness of regions 114, 116, 118, 120, 122 in FIG.
115の厚さに対して十分異なる厚さに変更すれば、 屈折率の変調が 2回存在す ることになる。 If the thickness is changed sufficiently to the thickness of 115, the refractive index modulation exists twice.
[0116] 第 4の有効な方法として、 フォトニックバンドギャップが狭く、 バンドの 折り返しが多く、 反対称モードのバンドにおける光の群速度が小さくなるよ う、 P r Cのパラメータを最適化する。 [0116] The fourth effective method is to optimize the parameter of PrC so that the photonic band gap is narrow, the band is folded back, and the group velocity of light in the antisymmetric mode band is reduced.
[0117] なお上記の 「反対称モードのバンドが存在する波長帯域の拡張方法」 は、 単独のみならず組み合わせて用いることも可能である。 逆に特定波長でのみ H型伝搬 (E ) を生じさせたい場合など、 反対称モードのバンドが存在する 波長帯域が狭いことが望ましい場合は、 上記の手段の逆を行えばよい。 Note that the above-mentioned “method of extending a wavelength band in which an antisymmetric mode band exists” can be used not only independently but also in combination. Conversely, if it is desirable that the wavelength band where the antisymmetric mode band exists is narrow, such as when generating H-type propagation (E) only at a specific wavelength, the above procedure may be reversed.
[0118] 4 . 第 16から第 19の発明の説明 [0118] 4. Description of the sixteenth through nineteenth inventions
以下、 第 16から第 19の発明について、 例示的に図面を参照しつつ、 詳細に 説明する。 Hereinafter, the sixteenth to nineteenth inventions will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[0119] 第 16の発明に関しては、 たとえば図 2において、 領域 207を占める n =2. 4 の媒質に代えてシリコン (以下、 S i ) を用い、 領域 208と領域 209を占める n = 1. 5の媒質に代えてシリコンカーバイト (以下 S i C、 p型半導体である) を用いた例により説明できる。 なお、 該 S iに真性半導体層 ( i層) と n型 半導体層 (n層) を形成すれば、 p i n接合を形成できる。 該 S i中の i層と n 層の屈折率はほぼ同じであるので、 光に対しては 2つの媒質による周期構造 体として振る舞う。 Regarding the sixteenth invention, for example, in FIG. 2, silicon (hereinafter referred to as S i) is used instead of the medium of n = 2.4 that occupies region 207, and n = 1. occupies region 208 and region 209. This can be explained by an example using silicon carbide (hereinafter referred to as S i C, p-type semiconductor) in place of medium No. 5. A pin junction can be formed by forming an intrinsic semiconductor layer (i layer) and an n- type semiconductor layer ( n layer) on the Si. Since the refractive index of the i layer and n layer in the Si is almost the same, the periodic structure with two media for light Act as a body.
[0120] 第 17の発明に関しては、 たとえば図 2において、 領域 207を占める n =2. 4 の媒質に代えて S iを用い、 領域 208を占める n = 1. 5の媒質に代えて透明導 電体である酸化スズ (以下 Sn02、 n型半導体である) を用い、 領域 209を占め る n = 1. 5の媒質に代えて S i Cを用い、 該 S iに真性半導体層 ( i層) と n型 半導体層 (n層) を形成した例により説明できる。 この場合の周期構造体は Z方向に電気伝導性を有する。 なお、 該 S i Cと Sn02の屈折率はほぼ同じである ので、 光に対しては 2つの媒質による周期構造体として振る舞う。 [0120] With respect to the seventeenth invention, for example, in Fig. 2, Si is used instead of the medium of n = 2.4 that occupies the region 207, and the transparent guide is replaced with the medium of n = 1.5 that occupies the region 208. Using tin oxide (hereinafter referred to as Sn0 2 , n-type semiconductor), Si C instead of the medium of n = 1.5 that occupies the region 209, an intrinsic semiconductor layer (i Layer) and an n- type semiconductor layer (n layer). The periodic structure in this case has electrical conductivity in the Z direction. Since the refractive indexes of S i C and Sn0 2 are almost the same, they behave as a periodic structure with two media for light.
[0121 ] 第 18の発明に関しては、 H型伝搬を示す周期構造体の媒質のうち、 1つの 媒質が流体 (気体、 液体) であり、 その他の媒質が固体である例により説明 できる。 流体としては空気や液体などが該当し、 流体であれば周期構造体の 内外で出入リ可能であり、 流体の入れ替えによつて前記 H型伝搬が生じる波 長や H型伝搬 (E ) の分岐間隔を変化させることができる。 [0121] The eighteenth aspect of the invention can be explained by an example in which one medium is a fluid (gas, liquid) and the other medium is a solid among the medium of the periodic structure showing H-type propagation. The fluid includes air, liquid, etc. If it is a fluid, it can be moved in and out of the periodic structure, and the H-type propagation or E-branch (E) branching occurs when the fluid is replaced. The interval can be changed.
[0122] 第 19の発明に関しては、 たとえば図 1における屈折率 n = 1. 5の媒質または 屈折率 n 2. 4の媒質として非線形光学材料、 発光性物質のいずれかを用いた 例により説明できる。 H型伝搬 (A) から (D ) はいわば光を周期構造体内 に閉じこめる作用である。 光を閉じこめることにより、 周期構造体内での電 界強度が増大し、 均質媒質に比べ媒質と光の相互作用を増大させることがで きる。 つまり、 周期構造体の構成媒質が非線形性を有する光学的分極率をも つならば、 非線形光学効果の効率を増大させることができる。 さらに、 周期 構造体の構成媒質が光吸収性物質を含むならば、 吸収効率を増大させること ができる。 なお周期構造体においては高屈折率媒質に光の強度分布が集中す るため、 前記非線形光学材料、 発光性物質、 光増幅性物質と組み合わされる 他の媒質は非線形光学材料、 発光性物質、 光増幅性物質に比べ低屈折率であ ることが望ましい。 [0122] The nineteenth invention can be explained by an example using either a nonlinear optical material or a luminescent substance as a medium having a refractive index n = 1.5 or a medium having a refractive index n 2.4 in FIG. . H-type propagation (A) to (D) In other words, it is the effect of confining light within the periodic structure. By confining light, the electric field strength in the periodic structure increases, and the interaction between the medium and light can be increased compared to a homogeneous medium. That is, if the constituent medium of the periodic structure has an optical polarizability having nonlinearity, the efficiency of the nonlinear optical effect can be increased. Furthermore, if the constituent medium of the periodic structure contains a light-absorbing substance, the absorption efficiency can be increased. In the periodic structure, since the light intensity distribution is concentrated on the high refractive index medium, the other medium combined with the nonlinear optical material, light emitting substance, and light amplifying substance is a nonlinear optical material, light emitting substance, light. It is desirable that the refractive index be lower than that of the amplifying material.
[0123] 5 . 第 20及び第 21の発明の説明 [0123] 5. Description of the 20th and 21st inventions
以下、 第 20及び第 21の発明について、 例示的に図面を参照しつつ、 詳細に 説明する。 [0124] 前述のように、 前記周期構造体の周辺構造も光の伝搬を制御する手段とな る。 有効な周期構造体の周辺構造としては、 以下の 3種類があげられる。 Hereinafter, the twentieth and twenty-first inventions will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. [0124] As described above, the peripheral structure of the periodic structure also serves as a means for controlling the propagation of light. The following three types of periodic structures are available as effective periodic structures.
( a ) 異なる P r Cの長さ、 P r Cの方向、 次元数をもつ周期構造体のへテ 口接合。 つまり P T Vの和、 いわゆる合成ベクトルが異なる周期構造体同士 の接合を行う。 このとき接合される各周期構造体中の構成媒質は同じで、 各 周期構造体中の同種の構成媒質どうしが連続することが望ましい (第 20の発 明に相当する) 。 (a) Heterojunction of periodic structures with different lengths of P r C, directions of P r C, and number of dimensions. In other words, periodic structures with different PTV sums, so-called composite vectors, are joined. It is desirable that the constituent media in each periodic structure to be joined at this time are the same, and the same type of constituent media in each periodic structure be continuous (corresponding to the twentieth invention).
( b ) 周期構造体の端面を一様媒質と接続した構造 (第 21の発明に相当する (b) Structure in which the end face of the periodic structure is connected to a uniform medium (corresponding to the twenty-first invention)
) o ) o
( c ) 第 3の P T Vの方向に異なる周期、 媒質構成の異なる P h Cを直列接 続した構造。 (c) A structure in which PhCs with different periods and medium configurations are connected in series in the direction of the third PTV.
[0125] 第 20の発明に関しては、 例えば図 10に示す 「AC-2DPhC」 1001と平面多層膜 1 003との組み合わせにより説明できる。 「AC-2DPhC」 1001は 2方向に実質的な 周期を持ち、 平面多層膜 1003は Z方向の 1方向にのみ実質的な周期を有する ので、 当然にその P T Vの和、 いわゆる合成ベクトルは異なる。 また 「AC-2D PhCj 1001と平面多層膜 1003はともに多層膜であり、 各層は互いに連続してい る。 The twentieth invention can be explained by a combination of “AC-2DPhC” 1001 and planar multilayer film 1003 shown in FIG. 10, for example. “AC-2DPhC” 1001 has a substantial period in two directions, and the planar multilayer film 1003 has a substantial period only in one direction in the Z direction. “AC-2D PhCj 1001 and planar multilayer film 1003 are both multilayer films, and each layer is continuous with each other.
[0126] P T Vの和が異なる周期構造体同士としては、 異なる P r Cの長さ、 また は異なる P r Cの方向、 または異なる次元数をもつ周期構造体同士が挙げら れる。 [0126] Periodic structures with different PTV sums include periodic structures with different P r C lengths, different P r C directions, or different dimensions.
[0127] 第 20の発明の効果としては、 すでに述べたように平面多層膜 1003が 「AC-2D PhCj 1001の薄膜面内を伝搬する光を閉じこめる作用を有するように、 P T V の和が異なる 2つの周期構造体間で、 一定割合をもって光の受け渡し (透過 及び反射) させることができる。 さらにその割合を P T Vの長さや方向で制 御することができる。 また、 例えば図 10において、 平面多層膜 1003に代えて 、 「AC-2DPhC」 1001の周辺に適切な 3次元自己クローニング型フォトニック 結晶を並置することで、 図 10における出力ビーム 101 1から 1012を抑制できる [0128] 第 21の発明に関しては、 図 15に示す 「AC-2DPhC」 1401と周辺の大気や石英 基板 1402との組み合わせにより説明できる。 なお大気は n 1 . 0の一様媒質で ある。 H型伝搬 (C ) 及び (E ) は周辺の大気や石英基板 1402との組み合わ せにより発現する。 また図 12における劈開された端部を金属でコートすれば 出力ビーム 121 1を抑制できる。 [0127] The effect of the twentieth invention is that, as described above, the sum of PTV is different so that the planar multilayer film 1003 has the effect of confining light propagating in the thin film surface of AC-2D PhCj 1001. Light can be transferred (transmitted and reflected) at a constant rate between the two periodic structures, and the rate can be controlled by the length and direction of the PTV. Instead of 1003, by placing appropriate 3D self-cloning photonic crystals around the AC-2DPhC 1001, the output beams 1011 to 1012 in Fig. 10 can be suppressed. The twenty-first invention can be explained by a combination of “AC-2DPhC” 1401 shown in FIG. 15 and the surrounding air or quartz substrate 1402. The atmosphere is a uniform medium of n 1.0. H-type propagation (C) and (E) are manifested in combination with the surrounding atmosphere and the quartz substrate 1402. Further, if the cleaved end portion in FIG. 12 is coated with metal, the output beam 121 1 can be suppressed.
[0129] 前記 (c ) の構造に関しては、 たとえば図 1の領域 123の上に、 屈折率 n = 1 . 5の媒質による厚さ 120nmの薄膜と屈折率 n ½2. 1の媒質による厚さ 90nmの薄 膜を交互に、 かつ領域 123の凹凸形状を保持したまま積層することなどがあげ られる。 With regard to the structure of (c), for example, on the region 123 in FIG. 1, a thin film with a thickness of 120 nm by a medium having a refractive index n = 1.5 and a thickness by a medium having a refractive index n ½2.1 is 90 nm. For example, the thin films may be alternately stacked while the uneven shape of the region 123 is maintained.
[0130] P T Vの和が異なる周期構造体同士を Z方向に対して接合することで以下 のような効果が得られる。 まず、 前記 P T Vの向きが異なる複数の P h Cを 直列に接続することで、 例えば H型伝搬 (E ) によって、 スネルの法則に従 う透過光と同じ方向に進むビームの分岐方向を複数得られる。 次に、 構成物 質又は X Y平面上の周期の異なる複数の P h Cを直列に接続することで、 例 えば広い波長範囲で前述の H型伝搬 (E ) が得られる。 なお、 AC-PhCであれ ば、 基板の中で領域毎に凹凸の周期を変え、 多層膜の厚さも替えることによ リ、 ヘテロ構造 P h Cが既に実現されている (特許文献 1を参照) 。 [0130] The following effects can be obtained by joining periodic structures with different sums of P T Vs in the Z direction. First, multiple P h Cs with different PTV directions are connected in series to obtain multiple beam branching directions that proceed in the same direction as transmitted light according to Snell's law, for example, by H-type propagation (E). It is done. Next, by connecting multiple P h Cs with different constituents or periods on the XY plane in series, for example, the above-mentioned H-type propagation (E) can be obtained in a wide wavelength range. In the case of AC-PhC, the heterostructure PhC has already been realized by changing the period of unevenness for each region in the substrate and changing the thickness of the multilayer film (see Patent Document 1). )
[0131 ] 6 . 22の の [0131] 6.22 of
以下、 第 22の発明について、 例示的に図面を参照しつつ、 詳細に説明する Hereinafter, the twenty-second invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[0132] 前記 H型伝搬を発現させるためには、 第 1から第 15のいずれかの発明の周 期構造体を大面積で用意することが好ましいので、 現時点では薄膜の P h C 、 特に AC-PhCを用いることが望ましい。 実際、 図 1に示す構造の AC-PhCにお いては、 一般にデポジションまたはエッチングの粒子の平均的な入射方向が 基板に対して斜め方向になるようにすることで第 1から第 15のいずれかの発 明の周期構造体を大面積で用意することを実現できる。 具体的な製造方法に ついては、 以下で図面を参照しつつ説明する。 [0132] In order to develop the H-type propagation, it is preferable to prepare the periodic structure according to any one of the first to fifteenth inventions in a large area. It is desirable to use -PhC. In fact, in the AC-PhC having the structure shown in FIG. 1, in general, the average incident direction of deposition or etching particles is inclined with respect to the substrate. It is possible to prepare a periodic structure of the invention with a large area. A specific manufacturing method will be described below with reference to the drawings.
[0133] 図 17は、 基板と基板に入射する堆積粒子又はエッチング粒子の方向を示す 正面図である。 符号 1701は基板上に形成された凸部、 符号 1702は基板上に形 成された凹部、 符号 1703は堆積粒子またはエッチング粒子の平均の入射方向 を示す。 符号 1704および符号 1705は前記凸部の頂点を示す。 [0133] FIG. 17 shows the direction of the substrate and the deposited or etched particles incident on the substrate. It is a front view. Reference numeral 1701 denotes a convex portion formed on the substrate, reference numeral 1702 denotes a concave portion formed on the substrate, and reference numeral 1703 denotes an average incident direction of deposited particles or etching particles. Reference numerals 1704 and 1705 denote vertices of the convex portions.
[0134] 図 18は、 基板と基板に入射する堆積粒子又はエッチング粒子の方向を示す 上面図である。 符号 1801は基板の上面、 符号 1802は堆積粒子またはエツチン グ粒子の平均の入射方向、 符号 1803は基板上に形成された凹凸の周期の方向 を示す。 FIG. 18 is a top view showing the substrate and the direction of deposited particles or etching particles incident on the substrate. Reference numeral 1801 denotes the upper surface of the substrate, reference numeral 1802 denotes the average incident direction of the deposited particles or etching particles, and reference numeral 1803 denotes the direction of the period of the irregularities formed on the substrate.
[0135] 図 19は、 ターゲット及び基板の位置関係を示す上面図である。 符号 1901は ターゲット、 符号 1902は基板、 符号 1903は基板上に形成された凹凸の周期の 方向、 符号 1904は堆積粒子又はェッチング粒子またはェッチング粒子の平均 の入射方向を示す。 FIG. 19 is a top view showing the positional relationship between the target and the substrate. Reference numeral 1901 indicates a target, reference numeral 1902 indicates a substrate, reference numeral 1903 indicates the direction of the period of the irregularities formed on the substrate, and reference numeral 1904 indicates the average incident direction of the deposited particles, etching particles, or etching particles.
[0136] 図 20は、 ターゲットと基板との位置関係及び堆積粒子又はエッチング粒子 またはエッチング粒子の入射方向を示す正面及び側面図である。 図 20 ( a )は 正面図、 図 20 ( b )は側面図である。 FIG. 20 is a front view and a side view showing the positional relationship between the target and the substrate and the incident direction of the deposited particles, etching particles, or etching particles. Fig. 20 (a) is a front view and Fig. 20 (b) is a side view.
[0137] 第 22の発明に関しては、 例えば図 17から図 20に示す基板および堆積粒子ま たはエッチング粒子の基板に対する入射方向により説明できる。 図 1に示す A C-PhCを製造するに当たっては、 図 17のように凹凸またはノコギリ歯状の 2次 元または 1次元周期を形成された基板上に、 堆積粒子またはエッチング粒子 が入射方向の平均値が特定方向に集中する成膜プロセスをもって製造し (異 方性デポジション又は異方性エッチング) 、 堆積粒子またはエッチング粒子 の基板に対する入射角の平均の入射方向 1703が基板に対して斜方向であるこ とが望ましい。 また図 18のように基板 1801上に形成された凹凸の周期 1803と 堆積粒子またはエッチング粒子の平均の入射方向 1802のなす角度が 0度から 4 5度の間、 好ましくは 0度から 10度、 最も好ましくは 0度とする。 なお前記角 度は 0度において図 2における二つめの P T V202と X Y平面 (第 1および第 3の P T Vを含む面) との間の角度が最小になり、 対称性の崩れの程度は最 大となる。 [0137] The twenty-second invention can be explained by the incident directions of the substrate and deposited particles or etching particles with respect to the substrate shown in FIGS. 17 to 20, for example. In manufacturing the AC-PhC shown in Fig. 1, the deposited particles or etching particles are averaged in the incident direction on the substrate with irregular or sawtooth two-dimensional or one-dimensional period as shown in Fig. 17. Manufactured with a film formation process in which values are concentrated in a specific direction (anisotropic deposition or anisotropic etching), and the average incident direction 1703 of the incident angle of deposited particles or etched particles with respect to the substrate is oblique to the substrate. It is desirable to have it. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the angle formed by the period 1803 of the unevenness formed on the substrate 1801 and the average incident direction 1802 of the deposited particles or etching particles is between 0 ° and 45 °, preferably 0 ° to 10 °, Most preferably, it is 0 degree. When the angle is 0 degree, the angle between the second PT V202 in Fig. 2 and the XY plane (including the first and third PTV) is minimized, and the degree of symmetry breaking is maximum. It becomes.
[0138] 2次元周期構造体に関して最も簡便な方法は、 図 19および図 20のようにタ ーゲッ卜の軸外 (直上から外れている) に基板を配置し、 かつ基板に形成さ れた周期の方向 1903と円筒形のターゲッ卜 1901の中心と基板の重心を結ぶ方 向が互いに平行となるように配置して、 スパッタリング法を用いることであ る。 スパッタリング法ではターゲッ卜から飛び出すデポジション粒子は方向 性を持ち (粒子の飛ぶ方向がランダムではない) 、 ターゲットの軸外に飛散 するデポジション粒子は平均の入射方向 1904の方向に指向性を有する。 その ため、 凸部の頂点 1705に凸部の頂点 1704より多くの粒子が堆積し、 結果とし て図 1に示す AC-2DPhCが得られる。 [0138] The simplest method for a two-dimensional periodic structure is shown in Figs. 19 and 20. The substrate is placed off the axis of the target (displaced from directly above), and the direction of the period 1903 formed on the substrate and the direction connecting the center of the cylindrical target 1901 and the center of gravity of the substrate are parallel to each other It is to arrange so that the sputtering method is used. In the sputtering method, the deposition particles that jump out of the target have directionality (the direction in which the particles fly is not random), and the deposition particles scattered off the axis of the target have directivity in the direction of the average incident direction 1904. As a result, more particles are accumulated at the vertex 1705 of the convex portion than at the vertex 1704 of the convex portion, resulting in the AC-2DPhC shown in FIG.
[0139] 3次元周期構造体に関しては、 ターゲットの直上外 (軸外) に非特許文献 [0139] Regarding the three-dimensional periodic structure, non-patent literature on the outside of the target (off-axis)
2の 231ページ中の図 3 ( b )に記載されるような正方格子の 2次元周期をもつ 面内パターンをもつ基板が配置され、 かつ基板に形成された周期の方向と堆 積粒子またはエッチング粒子の平均の入射方向が互いに約 45度となるように 配置することが簡便である。 一方、 所望の伝搬方向を得るために基板に形成 された周期の方向と、 堆積粒子またはエッチング粒子の平均の入射方向がな す角度を利用することが可能である。 A substrate with an in-plane pattern with a two-dimensional period of a square lattice as described in Fig. 3 (b) on page 231 is arranged, and the direction of the period formed on the substrate and the deposited particles or etching It is convenient to arrange the particles so that the average incident directions are about 45 degrees. On the other hand, in order to obtain a desired propagation direction, it is possible to use an angle formed by the direction of the period formed on the substrate and the average incident direction of the deposited particles or the etching particles.
[0140] 例えば、 堆積粒子またはエッチング粒子の平均の入射方向と凹凸の周期の 一方 (周期 1とする) がなす角度を 0度とし、 堆積粒子またはエッチング粒 子の平均の入射方向と凹凸の周期のもう一方 (周期 2とする) のなす角度を 9 0度として作製すれば、 H型伝搬 (A) 、 ( E ) の伝搬は周期 1の方向のみに 生じる。 また堆積粒子またはエッチング粒子の平均の入射方向と周期 1のな す角度を 45度として作製すれば、 H型伝搬 (A) 、 ( E ) の伝搬は周期 1お よび周期 2の方向に生じる。 また前記角度の値によって周期 1の方向に生じ る H型伝搬 (E ) の光の強度および周期 2の方向に生じる H型伝搬 (E ) の 光の強度の比を調節できる。 [0140] For example, the angle formed by one of the average incident direction of deposited particles or etched particles and the period of irregularities (period 1) is 0 degrees, and the average incident direction of deposited particles or etched particles and the period of irregularities If the other angle (with period 2) is 90 degrees, the propagation of H-type propagation (A) and (E) occurs only in the direction of period 1. If the angle between the average incident direction of deposited particles or etched particles and the period 1 is 45 degrees, the propagation of H-type propagation (A) and (E) occurs in the direction of the period 1 and period 2. The ratio of the intensity of the H-type propagation (E) light generated in the direction of period 1 and the intensity of the H-type propagation (E) light generated in the direction of period 2 can be adjusted by the angle value.
[0141 ] 一方、 堆積粒子が基板と垂直な方向に指向性を持ち、 エッチング粒子が基 板に対して斜め方向に入射する (基板と垂直ではない方向に指向性を有する ) 工法でも同様に図 1記載の周期構造体を作製できる。 [0141] On the other hand, the deposition particles have directivity in the direction perpendicular to the substrate, and the etching particles are incident obliquely with respect to the substrate (having directivity in a direction not perpendicular to the substrate). The periodic structure described in 1 can be produced.
[0142] また、 図 16に示す P r Cを用いた 2次元 P h Cの製造方法としては、 ブレ ーズド回折格子のような形状の凹凸を有する基板の上に自己クローニング法 で製膜することで実現できる。 ブレーズド回折格子のような形状の凹凸を有 する基板の製造方法としては、 ステップ型のブレーズド回折格子に適切な条 件下でスパッタデポジションを行うことが有効である。 ターゲッ卜と基板の 位置関係は直上でよい。 なお、 ナノインプリントでもブレーズド型回折格子 のような断面形状を有する基板を作製できる。 [0142] In addition, as a manufacturing method of two-dimensional P h C using P r C shown in FIG. This can be achieved by depositing a film by a self-cloning method on a substrate having irregularities such as a distorted diffraction grating. As a method for manufacturing a substrate having irregularities such as a blazed diffraction grating, it is effective to perform sputter deposition under conditions suitable for a step-type blazed diffraction grating. The positional relationship between the target and the substrate may be directly above. Note that a substrate having a cross-sectional shape such as a blazed diffraction grating can also be produced by nanoimprinting.
[0143] 7 . 第 23から第 25の発明の説明 [0143] 7. Description of the 23rd to 25th inventions
以下、 第 23から第 25の発明について、 例示的に図面を参照しつつ、 詳細に 説明する。 上記第 1から第 21の発明は、 他の関連技術や他のデバイスと組み 合わせてさらに応用範囲を広げることができる。 Hereinafter, the twenty-third to twenty-fifth inventions will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The above first to twenty-first inventions can be further expanded in application range by combining with other related technologies and other devices.
[0144] 第 1から第 15の発明は、 別途電磁波源 (光源) がなければ、 その機能を発 現しない。 また、 第 1 1から第 14の発明は、 対称性の崩れに伴い偏光依存性を もつことから、 別途偏光分離素子、 偏光子又は位相板などと組み合わせて利 用すること有効である。 また、 従来の光の伝搬を制御するデバイスであるレ ンズ、 金属ミラーなどの反射手段と組み合わせることが有効である。 [0144] The first to fifteenth inventions do not exhibit their functions without a separate electromagnetic wave source (light source). In addition, since the 11th to 14th inventions have polarization dependency due to the breaking of symmetry, it is effective to separately use them in combination with a polarization separation element, a polarizer, or a phase plate. In addition, it is effective to combine it with a reflection means such as a lens or a metal mirror, which is a conventional device for controlling the propagation of light.
[0145] 一方、 H型伝搬を示す周期構造体とミラーとを組み合わせた間において、 ビームを往復させればビームの数をねずみ算式に増やすことができる。 また H型伝搬の結果生じた平行に進む複数のビームとレンズとを組み合わせれば 、 同一光源から生じた複数のビームを一点に集光させることができる。 この 集光させた一点に感光体を配置させれば光記録装置となる。 [0145] On the other hand, if the beam is reciprocated between the combination of the periodic structure showing the H-type propagation and the mirror, the number of beams can be increased to the number of equations. In addition, if a plurality of parallel beams and lenses generated as a result of H-shaped propagation are combined, a plurality of beams generated from the same light source can be condensed at one point. An optical recording device can be obtained by arranging a photoconductor at this condensed point.
[0146] また、 前記 H型伝搬 (E ) によって生じた互いに平行に進むビームはほぼ 同一偏光状態をもつが、 偏光消光比が劣化しているため、 偏光子、 反射型偏 光分離素子及びゥオークオフ型偏光分離素子などと組み合わせて偏光消光比 を回復させることが望ましい。 [0146] In addition, the beams traveling parallel to each other generated by the H-type propagation (E) have almost the same polarization state, but the polarization extinction ratio is deteriorated, so that the polarizer, the reflective polarization separation element, and the walk-off It is desirable to recover the polarization extinction ratio in combination with a type polarization separation element.
[0147] また、 光を信号伝達に用いる場合には、 変調器ゃ受光器が必要であり、 適 宜反射手段や回折格子などを組み合わせることも有効である。 さらに、 前記 H型伝搬 (E ) によって生じた互いに平行に進むビームを各々個別に利用す る場合には、 光導波路と組み合わせることが望ましい。 [0148] 次に、 第 24の発明について説明する。 第 24の発明によるデバイスを用いれ ば、 一つのビームを複数の同一方向に伝搬するビームに分岐させる機能を有 する光学素子に 1つの光源からでたビームを何度も入射させることが可能で ある。 さらに、 ビームの分岐方向が異なる複数の前記光学素子を用いれば、 ビームの強度を分散して前記光学素子の有効範囲内でほぼ均一にすることが できる。 また一つの平行ビームが複数の同一方向に伝搬するビームに分岐す る前記 H型伝搬を生じさせる周期構造体と反射型偏光子、 ミラー及び波長板 等を組み合わせることでも同様の効果を得ることができる。 なお、 最初に外 部から入射されるビームは複数であってもかまわない。 [0147] In addition, when light is used for signal transmission, a modulator or a light receiver is required, and it is also effective to combine reflection means and a diffraction grating appropriately. Furthermore, in the case where beams parallel to each other generated by the H-type propagation (E) are used individually, it is desirable to combine them with an optical waveguide. Next, the twenty-fourth invention will be described. If the device according to the twenty-fourth invention is used, a beam emitted from one light source can be incident many times on an optical element having a function of branching one beam into a plurality of beams propagating in the same direction. . Further, if a plurality of optical elements having different beam branching directions are used, the intensity of the beam can be dispersed and made substantially uniform within the effective range of the optical elements. The same effect can also be obtained by combining the periodic structure that generates the H-shaped propagation, which is branched into a plurality of beams propagating in the same direction, and a reflective polarizer, a mirror, a wave plate, and the like. it can. Note that there may be a plurality of beams incident from the outside first.
[0149] 次に、 第 25の発明について説明する。 第 25の発明は、 例えば光学的記録装 置として有効である。 また、 該デバイスは、 場合によっては、 電荷結合素子 ァレイ受光器または C M O Sセンサァレイや前記周期構造体と反射方向が同 一である反射手段を備えてもよい。 特に、 周期構造体によって、 入射光が同 一方向に伝搬する 2つ以上のビームに分岐され、 前記 2つ以上のビームのう ち少なくとも 1つのビームが前記空間光変調器を透過または反射し、 前記 2 つ以上のビームのうち前記空間光変調器を透過または反射したビームを含む 少なくとも 2つのビームが前記レンズを介して感光体中の同一の箇所に集光 するデバイスは光学的記録装置として有効である。 特に、 一つのビームを複 数の同一方向に伝搬するビームに分岐させる機能と 1つのレンズを用いれば 、 2つのビームを正確に 1点に集光させることができる (ただし、 スポット の広がりを無視する) 。 さらに、 2つのビームの一方または双方に 2次元の 強度分布変化を与えればホログラフィック記録に利用できる。 Next, the twenty-fifth aspect of the invention is described. The twenty-fifth invention is effective as an optical recording apparatus, for example. In some cases, the device may include a charge coupled device array light receiver, a CMOS sensor array, or reflecting means having the same reflection direction as the periodic structure. In particular, the periodic structure splits incident light into two or more beams propagating in the same direction, and at least one of the two or more beams transmits or reflects the spatial light modulator, A device in which at least two beams including the beam transmitted or reflected from the spatial light modulator among the two or more beams are condensed at the same location in the photosensitive member via the lens is effective as an optical recording apparatus. It is. In particular, if a single lens is used with the function of splitting a single beam into multiple beams propagating in the same direction, the two beams can be accurately focused at one point (however, the spread of the spot is ignored) ) Furthermore, if two-dimensional intensity distribution change is given to one or both of the two beams, it can be used for holographic recording.
[0150] 8 . フォ卜ニック 曰曰曰の 称、モード、と ¾ΒΨ¾ί皮の 交力 ¾0する力 さらに発明者は 「P h Cの反対称モードと外部平面波の結合効率を制御す る方法」 についても検討した。 以下 (1 ) 、 (2 ) については非特許文献 4 において知られており、 そのまま活用できる。 [0150] 8. The name of phonic moth, mode, and force of ¾ΒΨ¾ί leather ¾0 force Furthermore, the inventor is about "Method to control coupling efficiency of anti-symmetric mode of Ph C and external plane wave" Also examined. The following (1) and (2) are known in Non-Patent Document 4 and can be used as they are.
( 1 ) P h Cの反対称モードと外部平面波の結合効率は入射角に依存する。 (2) P h Cの反対称モードと外部平面波の結合効率は層数 (周期数) に依 存する。 (1) The coupling efficiency between the antisymmetric mode of P h C and the external plane wave depends on the incident angle. (2) The coupling efficiency between the antisymmetric mode of P h C and the external plane wave depends on the number of layers (number of periods).
[0151] なおここまで光を中心に解説した事柄は、 電磁波一般に適用できる。 [0151] The matters described so far centering on light are applicable to electromagnetic waves in general.
[0152] 上述するように、 第 1から第 19の発明に係る周期構造体の特殊性が明らか にされている。 そこで従来の周期構造体や P h Cと区別するため、 第 1から 第 10の発明に該当する周期構造体に特別な呼称を与えることとする。 すなわ ち、 図 2に示す P r C及び BAS及び同等の P r C及び BASを 「2D-横崩し ACBC」 、 該 「2D-横崩し ACBC」 による周期構造体を 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 、 図 2 に示す P r C及び BASを 3次元に拡張した P r C及び BASを 「3D-横崩し ACBC」 、 該 「3D-横崩し ACBC」 による周期構造体を 「3D-横崩し ACPC」 、 図 16 に示す P r C及び BAS及び同等の P r C及び BASを 「2D-内崩し ACBCj 、 該 「2D-内崩し ACBC」 による周期構造体を 「2D-内崩し ACPC」 と呼称すること とする。 [0152] As described above, the peculiarities of the periodic structure according to the first to nineteenth inventions have been clarified. Therefore, in order to distinguish from the conventional periodic structure and P h C, a special name is given to the periodic structure corresponding to the first to tenth inventions. In other words, the Pr C and BAS shown in Figure 2 and the equivalent P r C and BAS are “2D-collapsed ACBC”, and the “2D-collapsed ACBC” periodic structure is “2D-collapsed ACPC”. Pr C and BAS expanded to three dimensions in Pr C and BAS shown in Fig. 2 "3D-collapse ACBC", and the periodic structure by "3D-collapse ACBC" is "3D-collapse ACPC" Pr C and BAS and equivalent P r C and BAS shown in Fig. 16 are referred to as “2D-inside-down ACBCj” and the “2D-inside-down ACBC” periodic structure is referred to as “2D-inside-down ACPC”. And
実施例 1 Example 1
[0153] 本発明の実施例 1に係る光伝搬の制御素子について、 図面を用いて詳細に 説明する。 The light propagation control element according to Example 1 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
図 1記載の基板上に形成された周期構造体を用い、 n =1.5の媒質として Si 02、 n =2.4の媒質として五酸化ニオブ (以下、 Nb205) を用いる。 The periodic structure formed on the substrate shown in FIG. 1 is used, and Si 0 2 is used as a medium with n = 1.5, and niobium pentoxide (hereinafter, Nb 2 0 5 ) is used as a medium with n = 2.4.
[0154] 図 1に示す 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 の製造方法について説明する。 図 1の構造は 自己クローニング法及び第 22の発明に従い、 はじめに基板母材上に凹凸を形 成し、 次に基板上に整形層を形成し、 ついで多層膜を積層することによリ製 造できる。 [0154] A manufacturing method of “2D-collapse ACPC” shown in FIG. 1 will be described. The structure shown in FIG. 1 is manufactured by first forming irregularities on the substrate base material, then forming a shaping layer on the substrate, and then laminating a multilayer film in accordance with the self-cloning method and the twenty-second invention. it can.
[0155] まず基板 124について説明する。 図 21は図 1に示す基板 124を表す模式的な 斜視図である。 符号 2101は基板母材、 符号 2102は基板母材上に形成された凹 凸の凸部を表す。 基板母材上に形成された凹凸の周期性は X方向にのみ有し ており、 Y方向には一様である。 [0155] First, the substrate 124 will be described. FIG. 21 is a schematic perspective view showing the substrate 124 shown in FIG. Reference numeral 2101 denotes a substrate base material, and reference numeral 2102 denotes a concave-convex convex portion formed on the substrate base material. The periodicity of the irregularities formed on the substrate base material has only in the X direction and is uniform in the Y direction.
[0156] 基板 124の材質として溶融石英を用い、 平面溶融石英基板上には電子ビーム [0156] A fused silica is used as the material of the substrate 124, and an electron beam is placed on the flat fused quartz substrate.
(以下 EB) 露光によるリソグラフィー工程とドライエッチングで 410nm周期 (凸部 (突起部) の高さおよび幅は 205nm) の矩形の凹凸 (以下基板パターン とする) が形成されている。 基板上への基板パターンの形成方法について補 足すると、 E Bによるリソグラフィ一とエッチングを組み合わせた工程、 光 又は X線露光によるリソグラフィ一とエッチングを組み合わせた工程、 又は ナノインプリン卜等が利用できる。 また紫外線領域で不透明な材料の基板又 は透明基板上に積層された十分な厚さの紫外線領域で不透明材質の膜を用い れば、 干渉露光とエッチングを組み合わせた工程でも基板上への凹凸を形成 できる。 本実施例では凸凹の形状精度に優れエッチングが容易であることか ら、 溶融石英基板に対して E Bによるリソグラフィ一とエッチングを組み合 わせた工程を採用することが好ましい。 (Hereinafter referred to as EB) 410nm period in lithography process and dry etching by exposure A rectangular irregularity (hereinafter referred to as a substrate pattern) having a convex part (projection part height and width of 205 nm) is formed. Complementing the method of forming a substrate pattern on the substrate, a process that combines lithography and etching by EB, a process that combines lithography and etching by light or X-ray exposure, or a nano-imprinting method can be used. In addition, if an opaque material film is used in a UV layer that is sufficiently thick and laminated on a substrate that is opaque in the UV region or a transparent substrate, unevenness on the substrate can be produced even in a process that combines interference exposure and etching. Can be formed. In this embodiment, it is preferable to employ a process in which lithography and etching using EB are combined with a fused silica substrate because etching is easy and etching is excellent in shape accuracy.
[0157] 次に中間層 (整形層) 1 12について説明する。 図 22は図 1に示す基板 124お よび整形層 1 12を表す図である。 符号 2201は図 21記載の基板を表し、 符号 2202 は整形層 (中間層 1 12と同じ) を表す。 周期性は X方向にのみ有している。 図 21記載の基板上に凹凸を形成した後、 該基板上に適切な条件下で r fバ ィァススパッタリング法 (スパッタエッチングも効果を伴う r f スパッタリ ング) により S i 02膜を堆積させることで三角形形状の整形層を形成する。 この とき図 19および図 20のように、 基板をターゲットの直上から外し、 かつター ゲッ卜の径方向と基板の周期方向をほぼ同一方向とすることで、 Z X平面で の断面が非二等辺三角形 (三辺の長さが異なる三角形) 形状の整形層が実現 できる。 [0157] Next, the intermediate layer (shaping layer) 112 will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the substrate 124 and the shaping layer 112 shown in FIG. Reference numeral 2201 represents the substrate shown in FIG. 21, and reference numeral 2202 represents the shaping layer (same as the intermediate layer 112). The periodicity is only in the X direction. After forming irregularities on the substrate shown in FIG. 21, deposit an S i 0 2 film on the substrate by rf-bias sputtering (rf sputtering with effect of sputter etching) under appropriate conditions. To form a triangular shaped shaping layer. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the substrate is removed from right above the target, and the radial direction of the target and the periodic direction of the substrate are made substantially the same direction, so that the cross section in the ZX plane is a non-isosceles triangle. (Triangles with different lengths on three sides) A shaped shaping layer can be realized.
[0158] 次に、 図 1に示す S i 02層 101から 1 1 1および Nb205層 1 13から 123よりなる多層膜 について説明する。 図 22に示す整形層 2202が積層された基板の上に、 さらに 図 19および図 20の配置で Nb205、 S i 02を交互に積層すれば図 1に示す断面形状が 得られる。 S i 02層および Nb205層の積層は r fバイアススパッタリングにて行う 図 23は実際に作製した 2次元自己クローニング型 P h C (2D-横崩し ACPC) の Z X平面における断面の電子顕微鏡写真である。 なお積層周期は 1 1周期で ある。 図 23において、 白に近い外観の層は Nb205層、 黒に近い外観の層は S i 02層 であり、 基板および整形層は同一組成の材料からなるため区別がつかない。 Next, a multilayer film composed of the Si 0 2 layers 101 to 11 1 and the Nb 2 0 5 layers 113 to 123 shown in FIG. 1 will be described. If Nb 2 0 5 and S i 0 2 are alternately laminated on the substrate on which the shaping layer 2202 shown in FIG. 22 is laminated, the cross-sectional shape shown in FIG. 1 is obtained. S i 0 2 layer and Nb 2 0 5 layer are stacked by rf bias sputtering. Figure 23 is an electron microscope of the cross section in the ZX plane of the 2D self-cloning P h C (2D-collapsed ACPC) actually fabricated. It is a photograph. The stacking cycle is 11 cycles. In Figure 23, the layer with the appearance close to white is Nb 2 0 5 layer, and the layer with the appearance close to black is S i 0 2 layer The substrate and the shaping layer are indistinguishable because they are made of the same composition material.
[0160] 図 23によれば膜の成長方向が約 4度傾いていることがわかる。 図 23では多 層膜の初期の 3層目までは形状が安定せず、 4層目から形状が安定化してい るが、 別段問題ない。 なお膜の成長方向が第 3の P T Vの方向となり、 この 第 3の P T Vを図 1における X Y平面に投影した方向が H型伝搬 (A) から ( E ) における光の伝搬または分岐が生じる方向となる。 [0160] According to Fig. 23, it can be seen that the growth direction of the film is inclined by about 4 degrees. In Fig. 23, the shape is not stable up to the initial third layer of the multilayer film, and the shape is stabilized from the fourth layer, but there is no problem. The direction of film growth is the direction of the third PTV, and the direction in which the third PTV is projected onto the XY plane in Fig. 1 is the direction in which the propagation or branching of light from H-type propagation (A) to (E) occurs. Become.
[0161 ] 次に周期構造体の作製方法について補足する。 Nb205膜を積層する場合、 タ ーゲッ卜としては例えば Nb205焼結体、 堆積ガスとしては例えばアルゴンと酸 素の混合ガス、 ガス圧力としては例えば 0. 3Paから 1 . OPa (好ましくは 0. 4Paか ら 0. 8Pa、 よリ好ましくは膜の在留応力と密度のバランスがとれる条件の 0. 5P aから 0. 7Paである) 、 酸素ガス流量比としては例えば 10%程度 (好ましくは 5 %以上 20%以下、 より好ましくは製膜速度 (時間あたりの膜厚増加量) と 組成の安定性のバランスがとれる条件の 7 %以上 15%以下である) であるこ とが好ましい。 S i 02膜を積層する場合、 ターゲットとしては例えば石英であり 、 堆積ガスとしては例えばアルゴンと酸素の混合ガス、 ガス圧力としては例 ぇば0. 3 3から2. 0 3 (好ましくは 0. 6Paから 1. 8Pa、 より好ましくは、 膜の在 留応力と密度のバランスのとれる条件の 0. 8Paから 1. 5Paである) であること が好ましい。 印加するバイアスはその最適値に他の成膜条件に対する依存性 や装置依存性があるものの、 数十 V程度であることが好ましい。 薄膜プロセ スにおける基板加熱温度は通常では媒質の融点の 0. 3倍以上が望ましいとされ るが、 好ましくは 0. 3倍以上 0. 5倍以下、 より好ましくは、 膜の密度と加熱冷 却に必要な時間のバランスのとれる 0. 31倍以上 0. 4倍以下である。 本実施例で は基板加熱温度を約 600Kとすることが好ましい。 [0161] Next, a supplementary description of a method for manufacturing a periodic structure will be provided. When stacking Nb 2 0 5 films, the target is, for example, an Nb 2 5 sintered body, the deposition gas is, for example, a mixed gas of argon and oxygen, and the gas pressure is, for example, 0.3 Pa to 1. OPa ( It is preferably 0.4 Pa to 0.8 Pa, more preferably 0.5 Pa to 0.7 Pa, which is a condition that balances the residence stress and density of the film.) The oxygen gas flow rate ratio is, for example, about 10% ( It is preferably 5% or more and 20% or less, and more preferably 7% or more and 15% or less under conditions that balance the film formation rate (the amount of increase in film thickness per hour) and the stability of the composition. When the S i 0 2 film is laminated, the target is, for example, quartz, the deposition gas is, for example, a mixed gas of argon and oxygen, and the gas pressure is, for example, 0.33 to 2.03 (preferably 0 6 Pa to 1.8 Pa, and more preferably 0.8 Pa to 1.5 Pa, which is a condition that balances the residence stress and density of the film. The bias to be applied is preferably about several tens of volts, although the optimum value depends on other film formation conditions and the apparatus. The substrate heating temperature in the thin film process is usually desirably 0.3 times or more of the melting point of the medium, but is preferably 0.3 to 0.5 times, more preferably the film density and heating cooling. The balance of the time required for this is 0.31 times or more and 0.4 times or less. In this embodiment, the substrate heating temperature is preferably about 600K.
[0162] また、 前記 r fバイアススパッタリング法、 E C Rスパッタリング法、 ピ ラミツド型に整形された基板上にバイアスを加えない r f マグネトロンスパ ッタリングとスパッタリング、 イオンガン、 R I Eなどのエッチングの組み 合わせによっても 2D-横崩し ACPCを作製することが可能である。 [0162] In addition, the rf bias sputtering method, ECR sputtering method, rf magnetron sputtering that does not apply bias on a substrate shaped into a pillar type, and sputtering, ion gun, RIE, and other etching combinations can also be used for 2D-transverse. Breaking ACPC can be made.
[0163] なお、 膜の成長方向 (P T Vの方向に等しい) はターゲットの径方向と基 板の周期方向の間の角度を変えることで制御することが可能であり、 かつタ ーゲッ卜と基板の距離などでも制御可能である。 また 「3D-横崩し ACPC」 は、 例えば図 18におけるエッチング粒子の平均の入射方向 1802と凹凸の周期 1803 のなす角度を 0度から 90度の間で調整することにより、 P T Vの方向を制御 できる。 [0163] Note that the growth direction of the film (equal to the PTV direction) depends on the radial direction of the target. It can be controlled by changing the angle between the periodic directions of the plate, and it can also be controlled by the distance between the target and the substrate. In addition, “3D-collapse ACPC” can control the direction of PTV by adjusting the angle between the average incident direction 1802 of etching particles in FIG. 18 and the period 1803 of irregularities between 0 degrees and 90 degrees, for example. .
[0164] 本実施例では P h Cにおける高屈折率媒質として Nb205を用いたが、 SiC、 Si Ox (ただし 0<x<2) 、 五酸化タンタル (Ta205) 、 二酸化チタン (Ti02) 、 ガリウムナイトライド (GaN) 、 アルミニウムナイトライド (AIN) 、 酸化亜 鉛 (ZnO) 、 ZnSe、 I TO (Indium Thin Oxide) 、 酸化ハフニウム (Hf02) 、 a-Si0、 SiN等の n≥ 2の媒質のいずれかを組み合わせて用いることも有効で ある。 また低屈折率媒質としてフッ化マグネシウム (MgF) 、 フッ化カルシゥ ム (CaF) などの n≤1.6の媒質のいずれかを組み合わせて用いることも有効 である。 In this example, Nb 2 0 5 was used as a high refractive index medium in P h C, but SiC, Si Ox (where 0 <x <2), tantalum pentoxide (Ta 2 0 5 ), titanium dioxide (Ti0 2 ), gallium nitride (GaN), aluminum nitride (AIN), zinc oxide (ZnO), ZnSe, ITO (Indium Thin Oxide), hafnium oxide (Hf0 2 ), a-Si0, SiN, etc. It is also effective to use a combination of any of n≥2. It is also effective to use a combination of n ≤ 1.6 media such as magnesium fluoride (MgF) and calcium fluoride (CaF) as the low refractive index medium.
[0165] 図 1 (および図 23) に示す周期構造体は前記 H型伝搬を示す。 図 24は図 1 に示す基板上に形成された周期構造体の、 スネルの法則に従って透過したビ ームの垂直入射時における透過率波長依存性を示すグラフである。 図 24(a) は入射ビームが T E偏波、 図 24(b)は入射ビームが TM偏波の場合にそれぞ れ対応する特性である。 図 24(a)及び(b)に示すように、 図 1 (および図 23 ) に示す周期構造体は回折格子や波長選択フィルタ等の従来の光学素子とは 異なる透過率波長依存性をもつことが分かる。 [0165] The periodic structure shown in Fig. 1 (and Fig. 23) exhibits the H-type propagation. FIG. 24 is a graph showing the transmittance wavelength dependency of the periodic structure formed on the substrate shown in FIG. 1 when the beam transmitted according to Snell's law is perpendicularly incident. Figure 24 (a) shows the corresponding characteristics when the incident beam is TE polarized, and Figure 24 (b) shows the characteristics when the incident beam is TM polarized. As shown in Fig. 24 (a) and (b), the periodic structure shown in Fig. 1 (and Fig. 23) has a transmittance wavelength dependency different from that of conventional optical elements such as diffraction gratings and wavelength selective filters. I understand.
[0166] 本実施形態は、 H型伝搬 (E) を利用して、 例えば光の入射位置及び分岐 光の出射位置にレンズ付き光ファイバを設置することで、 光通信に用いられ る光分岐装置 (スター力ブラ) として利用できる。 また 1つのレーザー光源 からの平行ビームを 3つに分岐させることで、 トラッキングと読み書きを行 う 3ビームピックアップを容易に実現でき、 光記録装置に利用できる。 The present embodiment uses an H-type propagation (E) to install an optical fiber with a lens at, for example, an incident position of light and an outgoing position of branched light, thereby providing an optical branching device used for optical communication. Available as (star power bra). In addition, by splitting the parallel beam from one laser light source into three, a three-beam pickup for tracking and reading / writing can be easily realized and used for optical recording devices.
[0167] また、 H型伝搬 ( I ) を利用して、 本実施形態に対して Z方向から、 異な る波長のビームを各波長の分離距離と等しい間隔でかつ同一方向で入射すれ ば、 波長合成機構として利用でき、 例えば DVDと CDから信号を読みとる ピックァップの構造を簡略化できる。 [0167] In addition, by using H-type propagation (I), if beams of different wavelengths are incident on the same direction in the same direction and with a separation distance of each wavelength from the Z direction, Can be used as a synthesis mechanism, for example reading signals from DVD and CD The structure of the pick-up can be simplified.
また、 本実施形態に対して z方向から、 広いスペクトルをもつビームを入 射すれば波長分岐機構として利用でき、 例えば分光器として活用できる。 In addition, if a beam having a wide spectrum is incident from the z direction with respect to this embodiment, it can be used as a wavelength branching mechanism, for example, as a spectroscope.
[0168] また、 他の発明としては、 前記 H型伝搬 (E) を生じさせる周期構造体を 用い、 ビームと同数のレンズを用いれば、 同一波長を利用する複数種類の光 記録ディスクに対応するピックアップを 1台で実現できる。 [0168] Further, as another invention, if the periodic structure that generates the H-shaped propagation (E) is used and the same number of lenses as the beam are used, it corresponds to a plurality of types of optical recording disks that use the same wavelength. One pickup can be realized.
実施例 2 Example 2
[0169] 本発明の実施例 2に係るホログラフィック光記録装置について、 図面を用 いて詳細に説明する。 本実施例は H型伝搬を利用したホログラフィック光記 録装置である。 A holographic optical recording apparatus according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. This embodiment is a holographic optical recording apparatus using H-type propagation.
[0170] 図 25はホログラフィック記録装置の基本構成を示す側面図である。 ホログ ラフィック記録装置はレーザー光源 2501、 レンズ 2502、 H型伝搬 (E) によ る光分岐機能を有する周期構造体 2503、 隣り合わせに一体化された空間光変 調器である DMD2504 (ディジタルマイクロミラーデバイス) とミラー 2505 、 反射型偏光分離素子 2506、 1Z4波長板 2507、 レンズ 2508、 記録媒体 2509 、 2次元撮像素子 (CMOSセンサ) を有する。 なお以後 H型伝搬 (E) 〜 H型伝搬 (K) による光分岐機能を有するデバイスを 「HBS」 と略記する FIG. 25 is a side view showing the basic configuration of the holographic recording apparatus. The holographic recording device is composed of a laser light source 2501, a lens 2502, a periodic structure 2503 having an optical branching function by H-type propagation (E), and a spatial light modulator integrated adjacent to each other DMD2504 (digital micromirror device) ), A mirror 2505, a reflective polarization separation element 2506, a 1Z4 wavelength plate 2507, a lens 2508, a recording medium 2509, and a two-dimensional image sensor (CMOS sensor). In the following, devices with optical branching function by H-type propagation (E) to H-type propagation (K) are abbreviated as “HBS”.
[0171] 図 26は記録時の動作を示す側面図である。 符号 2601は H BS2503に対する 入射平行ビーム、 符号 2602及び符号 2603は H BS2503から透過側に出力され る出力ビーム、 符号 2604はミラーで反射されたビーム、 符号 2605は DMD250 4で反射されたビーム、 符号 2606及び符号 2607は H BS2503から反射側に出力 される出力ビームをそれぞれ表す。 FIG. 26 is a side view showing the operation during recording. Reference numeral 2601 is an incident parallel beam to H BS2503, reference numerals 2602 and 2603 are output beams output from the transmission side of HBS2503, reference numeral 2604 is a beam reflected by a mirror, reference numeral 2605 is a beam reflected by DMD2504, reference numeral Reference numerals 2606 and 2607 respectively denote output beams output from the HBS 2503 to the reflection side.
[0172] 図 26を用いて記録時の動作を説明する。 レーザー光源から出力された平行 ビームが H B Sに入射した後、 透過側から 2つの平行に伝搬するビームとし て出力される。 その後 2つのビームの一方が DM Dにより 2次元ページデー タを付与され、 もう一方のビームは D M Dと同一基板上に形成された誘電体 多層膜によるミラーで反射される。 ついで各々のビームは、 共通のレンズの 焦点位置に集光し、 感光物質からなる記録媒体に干渉縞の形でデータを記録 する。 [0172] The operation during recording will be described with reference to FIG. After the parallel beam output from the laser light source is incident on the HBS, it is output as two parallel propagating beams from the transmission side. After that, one of the two beams is given 2D page data by DMD, and the other beam is reflected by a mirror with a dielectric multilayer film formed on the same substrate as DMD. Then each beam is a common lens Condensed light at the focal point and recorded in the form of interference fringes on a recording medium made of a photosensitive material.
[0173] 図 27は再生時の動作を示す側面図である。 符号 2701は H B S 2503に対する 入射平行ビーム、 符号 2702及び符号 2703は H B S 2503から透過側に出力され る出力ビーム、 符号 2704はミラーで反射されたビーム、 符号 2705は記録媒体 2 509で反射されたビーム、 符号 2706は反射型偏光分離素子 2506で反射されたビ ームをそれぞれ表す。 FIG. 27 is a side view showing the operation during reproduction. Reference numeral 2701 is an incident parallel beam to the HBS 2503, reference numerals 2702 and 2703 are output beams output from the HBS 2503 to the transmission side, reference numeral 2704 is a beam reflected by a mirror, and reference numeral 2705 is a beam reflected by a recording medium 2509. Reference numerals 2706 denote beams reflected by the reflective polarization separation element 2506, respectively.
[0174] 図 27を用いて再生時の動作を説明する。 レンズの付いたレーザー光源から 出力された平行ビームが H B Sに入射した後、 透過側から 2つの平行に伝搬 するビームとして出力される。 その後、 全ての画素がオフ状態の D M Dによ リ、 2つのビームの一方が遮断され、 もう一方のビームは D M Dと同一基板 上に形成された誘電体多層膜によるミラーで反射される。 この反射されたビ ームは、 反射型偏光分離素子及び 1 Z 4波長板を透過した後、 レンズにより 焦点位置に集光され、 記録媒体の干渉縞の形で強度分布情報が付与される。 該情報が付与されて記録媒体から反射されたビームは、 反射型偏光分離素子 で反射されて、 2次元撮像素子に入射する。 [0174] The operation during playback will be described with reference to FIG. A parallel beam output from a laser light source with a lens is incident on H B S and then output as two beams propagating in parallel from the transmission side. After that, all the pixels are turned off by D M D, one of the two beams is blocked, and the other beam is reflected by a mirror made of a dielectric multilayer film formed on the same substrate as D M D. The reflected beam passes through the reflective polarization separation element and the 1 Z 4 wavelength plate, and is then focused at the focal position by the lens, and intensity distribution information is given in the form of interference fringes on the recording medium. The beam to which the information is applied and reflected from the recording medium is reflected by the reflective polarization separation element and enters the two-dimensional image sensor.
[0175] 信号処理等については従来のホログラフィック記録と同様でよい。 また D M Dは原則として再生時にはオフ状態とされるが、 D M Dがオン状態であつ ても D M D反射光とミラ一反射光は 2次元撮像素子の十分離れた位置に入射 するため再生に悪影響は与えないが、 記録媒体の感光材料を劣化させる場合 があるためオフ状態にすることが望ましい。 [0175] Signal processing and the like may be the same as those of conventional holographic recording. In principle, the DMD is turned off during playback. However, even if the DMD is on, the DMD reflected light and the mirror-reflected light are incident sufficiently far away from the two-dimensional image sensor, so there is no adverse effect on playback. However, it may be deteriorated because it may deteriorate the photosensitive material of the recording medium.
[0176] 図 28は本実施例に用いる H B Sを示す図である。 H B S中の第 1の領域 280 1と第 3の領域 2803は自己クローニング型 3次元 P h C 「3D-横崩し ACPC」 で 、 X Y平面上の凹凸の周期が 180nmの正方格子状の周期構造を有する。 第 2の 領域 2802は図 1と同様に作製された基板の凹凸の周期が 205nmの 「2D-横崩し A CPC」 である。 第 4の領域 2804は 1次元周期構造体である。 符号 2805はビーム の入射および出射位置、 符号 2806はビームの出射位置である。 FIG. 28 is a diagram showing H B S used in this example. The first region 2801 and the third region 2803 in the HBS are self-cloning 3D Ph C “3D-collapse ACPC”, and the periodic structure of a square lattice with an uneven period on the XY plane of 180 nm Have. The second region 2802 is “2D-collapse A CPC” in which the period of unevenness of the substrate fabricated in the same manner as in FIG. 1 is 205 nm. The fourth region 2804 is a one-dimensional periodic structure. Reference numeral 2805 denotes the incident and outgoing positions of the beam, and reference numeral 2806 denotes the outgoing position of the beam.
[0177] 図 28を用いて H B S 2503を説明する。 H B S 2503中の第 1の領域 2801は自 己クローニング型 3次元 P h Cで、 X Y平面上の凹凸の周期が 180nmの正方格 子状の周期構造を有する。 第 2の領域 2802は実施例 1と同様に作製された基 板の凹凸の周期が 205nmの 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 である。 第 3の領域 2803は第 1 の領域 2801と同じである。 第 4の領域 2804は X Y方向に周期を持たない 1次 元多層膜である。 第 1の領域 2801は波長 405nmでバンドギャップを持ち、 第 2 の領域 2802から Y方向への漏れ光を抑制する。 また第 2の領域 2802の寸法は ビームが 2つ出射するよう 4隱とした。 また反射側に出射されるビームはレ 一ザ一光源のモニタ用として利用できる。 なお第 2の領域 2802は 「2D-内崩し ACPC」 であってもかまわない。 [0177] The HBS 2503 will be described with reference to FIG. The first area 2801 in HBS 2503 is It is a self-cloning 3D P h C, and has a square lattice-like periodic structure with an irregular period of 180 nm on the XY plane. The second region 2802 is “2D-collapsed ACPC” in which the period of unevenness of the substrate manufactured in the same manner as in Example 1 is 205 nm. The third area 2803 is the same as the first area 2801. The fourth region 2804 is a one-dimensional multilayer film having no period in the XY direction. The first region 2801 has a band gap at a wavelength of 405 nm, and suppresses leakage light from the second region 2802 in the Y direction. The size of the second region 2802 is 4 mm so that two beams are emitted. The beam emitted to the reflection side can be used for monitoring a laser light source. The second area 2802 may be “2D-inverted ACPC”.
[0178] 一般にホログラフィック記録では、 特許文献 2に記載されているように、 同一のレーザー光源から多数回の反射を伴う光学系を用い、 情報光と参照光 を別の部品で処理するため、 振動に弱く (例えば円盤形ディスクの回転時に 生じる面ぶれ) 、 環境変化に対する安定性に乏しいとされている。 しかし図 2 8に示す H B Sを用い、 図 25の光学系を用いれば各部品の位置ずれ、 角度ずれ が生じても情報光と参照光は常に同一の点に集光するため、 安定した記録が 可能である。 [0178] In general, in holographic recording, as described in Patent Document 2, an optical system with multiple reflections from the same laser light source is used, and information light and reference light are processed by separate components. It is said to be weak against vibration (for example, surface runout that occurs when a disc-shaped disk rotates) and has poor stability against environmental changes. However, if the HBS shown in Fig. 28 is used and the optical system shown in Fig. 25 is used, the information beam and the reference beam are always focused on the same point even if the position and angle of each component are shifted. Is possible.
実施例 3 Example 3
[0179] 本発明の実施例 3に係る装置について、 図面を用いて詳細に説明する。 本 実施例は、 H型伝搬を利用した光の強度分布の均一化及び偏光変換を行う装 置である。 本実施例に係る装置は、 特に投影型ディスプレイ (プロジェクタ ) での光強度均一化及び無偏光光源からの偏光変換での使用が適している。 An apparatus according to Example 3 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The present embodiment is an apparatus that performs uniform light intensity distribution and polarization conversion using H-type propagation. The apparatus according to the present embodiment is particularly suitable for use in making the light intensity uniform in a projection display (projector) and in polarization conversion from a non-polarized light source.
[0180] 従来、 液晶プロジェクタでは特許文献 3や特許文献 5に記載された p s偏 光変換素子を用いて、 無偏光光源であるランプから直線偏光を得てきた。 Conventionally, in a liquid crystal projector, linearly polarized light has been obtained from a lamp that is a non-polarized light source using the p s polarization conversion element described in Patent Document 3 and Patent Document 5.
[0181 ] また、 ランプまたはランプに付属する反射鏡からの円形断面をもつ光束を 、 矩形の液晶パネルに有効に当てるためにオプティカルインテグレータ (opt i ca l i ntegrator. 以下 Op lと略記する) が用いられている。 Op lとしては、 特 許文献 4、 特許文献 5に記載された例が知られる。 [0181] In addition, the optical integrator (opt i cal ntegrator. Hereinafter abbreviated as Op l) is used to effectively apply the luminous flux having a circular cross section from the lamp or the reflector attached to the lamp to the rectangular liquid crystal panel. It has been. Examples of Op l include the examples described in Patent Document 4 and Patent Document 5.
[0182] 本実施例は、 H型伝搬を示す周期構造体を用い、 簡単かつ小型な構成で光 強度の均一化と偏波変換を行うと共に、 その出力光が 1方向に集中する偏光 補償型 Opl (以下、 rPC-0pl」 と略記する) である。 [0182] This example uses a periodic structure showing H-type propagation, and has a simple and compact configuration. This is a polarization-compensated Opl (hereinafter abbreviated as rPC-0pl) that equalizes the intensity and converts the polarization and concentrates the output light in one direction.
[0183] 図 29は PC-0plの側面図及び PC-0pl内部での光の伝搬を示す図である。 図 29 に示す PC-0plは、 レンズ付き光ファイバ 2901、 ミラー 2902、 1Z4波長板 290 3、 HBS群2904〜2907、 P h C反射型偏光分離素子 2908、 遮光板 2909を有す る。 符号 2910はレンズ付き光フアイ/ 2901から出力される平行ビームを表す 。 レンズ付き光ファイバ 2901からのビームの進行方向に対して直列に配置さ れた HBS群 2904〜2907、 2次元 P h Cによる反射型偏光分離素子 2908、 ミ ラー 2902は平行ビーム 2910に対して 3度傾けて配置してあり、 H B S2904と ミラー 2902の間隔は 20mmである。 FIG. 29 is a side view of PC-0pl and a diagram showing light propagation inside PC-0pl. PC-0pl shown in FIG. 29 has an optical fiber 2901 with a lens, a mirror 2902, a 1Z4 wavelength plate 2903, an HBS group 2904 to 2907, a PhC reflection type polarization separation element 2908, and a light shielding plate 2909. Reference numeral 2910 represents a parallel beam output from the optical fiber with lens / 2901. HBS groups 2904 to 2907 arranged in series with respect to the traveling direction of the beam from the optical fiber 2901 with a lens, a reflective polarization separation element 2908 with a two-dimensional Ph C, and a mirror 2902 with respect to a parallel beam 2910 3 The distance between HB S2904 and mirror 2902 is 20mm.
[0184] 図 29を用いて動作を説明する。 まず、 レンズ付き光ファイバ 2901からの出 力光 2910は、 1Z4波長板 2903を介して HBS2904に入射して、 透過側に 3 本のビームに分岐されて出力される。 HBS 2904の透過側に出力した 3本の ビームは次の H B S 2905に入射してビームが透過側に 9本に分岐されて出力 される。 このように後段の HBSになるに従って透過側に出力されるビーム の数は増加する。 [0184] The operation will be described with reference to FIG. First, the output light 2910 from the optical fiber 2901 with a lens is incident on the HBS 2904 via the 1Z4 wavelength plate 2903, branched into three beams on the transmission side, and output. The three beams output to the transmission side of HBS 2904 are incident on the next H B S 2905, and the beams are split into nine beams on the transmission side and output. Thus, the number of beams output to the transmission side increases as the latter HBS is reached.
[0185] さらに、 レンズ付き光ファイバ 2901からの出力光 2910は、 1Z4波長板 290 3を介して H B S2904に入射して、 反射側に 3本のビームに分岐されて出力さ れる。 HBS2904の反射側に出力した 3本のビームは 1 Z4波長板 2903を透 過してミラーで反射し、 再び 1 Z4波長板を透過して再度 HBS2904に入射 する。 再度 H B S 2904に入射してビームが透過側に 9本に分岐されて出力さ れる。 ただしビームの位置が重なるものがあるため、 実際のビームの数は 5 本となる。 また再度 HBS2904に入射してビームが透過側に 9本に分岐され て出力される位置は、 レンズ付き光ファイバ 2901からの出力光 2910が 1 Z4 波長板 2903を介して H B S2904に入射して、 透過側に 3本のビームに分岐さ れて出力される位置とは異なる。 なお記載されないが、 再度 HBS2904に入 射したビームは、 反射側に 9本 (ビームの重なりによって実際は 5本) に分 岐されて出力する。 [0186] このように H B S間や反射型偏光分離素子 2908、 ミラー 2902で透過、 多重 反射を繰り返すごとにビームの数は増大する (その様は、 例えば、 核分裂に おける連鎖反応に似ている) 。 Furthermore, the output light 2910 from the optical fiber 2901 with a lens enters the HB S2904 via the 1Z4 wavelength plate 2903, and is branched into three beams on the reflection side and output. The three beams output to the reflection side of the HBS2904 pass through the 1 Z4 wave plate 2903, are reflected by the mirror, pass through the 1 Z4 wave plate again, and enter the HBS 2904 again. The light is incident on HBS 2904 again, and the beam is split into 9 beams on the transmission side and output. However, since there are some overlapping beam positions, the actual number of beams is five. In addition, the position where the light is incident again on the HBS2904 and the beam is split into nine beams on the transmission side and output is as follows. It is different from the position where it is split into three beams on the transmission side and output. Although not described, the beam incident on the HBS2904 again is divided into nine beams on the reflection side (actually five beams due to beam overlap) and output. [0186] In this way, the number of beams increases with each repetition of transmission and multiple reflection between HBS, reflection type polarization separation element 2908, and mirror 2902 (such as, for example, a chain reaction in fission). .
[0187] H B S間、 反射型偏光分離素子 2908— H B S間、 H B S—ミラー間などで 反射と分岐を繰り返したビームが多数存在するため、 反射型偏光分離素子 290 8を透過した光は多くのビームが重なった強度分布が均一化された直線偏光と なる。 [0187] Because there are many beams that are repeatedly reflected and branched between the HBS, the reflective polarization separation element 2908—between the HBS, and between the HBS mirrors, the light that has passed through the reflective polarization separation element 290 8 is a large number of beams. The intensity distribution with the overlap is linearly polarized light.
[0188] また、 ミラー 2902、 H B S 2904〜2907、 反射型偏光分離素子 2908を平行に 配置し、 入射光が平行ビームであるので、 反射型偏光分離素子 2908を透過す る光はいわゆるテレセントリックな光となる。 さらにレンズ付き光ファイバ を多数設置すればさらに大面積でほぼ均一な光が得られる。 また遮光板 2909 によって反射型偏光分離素子 2908を透過した光の外周部の均一性が低い光を 遮断することができる。 [0188] Since the mirror 2902, the HBS 2904 to 2907, and the reflective polarization separation element 2908 are arranged in parallel, and the incident light is a parallel beam, the light transmitted through the reflective polarization separation element 2908 is so-called telecentric light. It becomes. Furthermore, if a large number of optical fibers with lenses are installed, almost uniform light can be obtained in a larger area. Further, the light shielding plate 2909 can block light having low uniformity in the outer peripheral portion of the light transmitted through the reflective polarization separation element 2908.
[0189] H B S群について説明する。 H B S群中の 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 は、 Z軸の回 リで各々 45度異なる光分岐方向を有し、 各々 2隱のビーム分離機能を有する 。 また、 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 の周辺には面内伝搬を遮断する 1次元平面多層膜 が配置される。 ただし、 面内伝搬をより効率的に遮断するには 1次元平面多 層膜に代えて、 製造コス卜の上昇を伴うが 3次元周期構造体または金属膜を 用いることが有効である。 また、 やはり製造コストの上昇を伴うが、 H B S の数が多いほど図 29における出力光の均一性が向上する。 [0189] The H B S group will be described. “2D-collapsing ACPC” in the H B S group has 45 degrees of light splitting direction, and each has a beam separation function of 2 mm. In addition, a one-dimensional planar multilayer film that blocks in-plane propagation is placed around “2D-collapse ACPC”. However, in order to cut off the in-plane propagation more efficiently, it is effective to use a three-dimensional periodic structure or a metal film instead of a one-dimensional planar multilayer film, although this increases production costs. Although the manufacturing cost also increases, the uniformity of output light in FIG. 29 improves as the number of H B S increases.
[0190] 他の部品について説明する。 レンズ付き光ファイバ 2901は緑色のレーザー 光源と接続されており、 出力ビームのビーム径は 1隱である。 反射型偏光分 離素子 2908は最終的な出力光を所定の方位を有する直線偏光に選択する作用 を持ち、 偏光分離素子に対する入射光に含まれる出力光の偏光方向と直交す る偏光成分は反射され、 再度 H B Sに入射させる。 反射型偏光分離素子とし て 2次元 P h Cを用いるのは、 透過率および反射率を任意に設定できるため であり、 透過偏光方向についての透過率を 40%程度 (好ましくは 20%以上 60 %以下、 より好ましくは 30%以上 50%以下である) とすることで、 より光強 度分布を均一化できる。 [0190] Other components will be described. The optical fiber with lens 2901 is connected to a green laser light source, and the beam diameter of the output beam is 1 mm. The reflective polarization separation element 2908 has a function of selecting the final output light as linearly polarized light having a predetermined direction, and the polarization component orthogonal to the polarization direction of the output light included in the incident light to the polarization separation element is reflected. It is incident on the HBS again. The reason why the two-dimensional PhC is used as the reflection type polarization separation element is that the transmittance and the reflectance can be set arbitrarily. The transmittance in the direction of the transmission polarization is about 40% (preferably 20% or more and 60% Or less, more preferably 30% or more and 50% or less). The degree distribution can be made uniform.
[0191 ] ミラ一 2902は誘電体多層膜からなり、 レンズ付き光フアイ/ 2901からの光 入射位置のみ多層膜が取リ除かれておリ、 光分岐機能を有する周期構造体の 戻り光を反射させる効果を持つ。 ミラーは透明ガラス板上にアルミニウム膜 を付着させたものも使用可能であるが、 平板ミラーであり、 光吸収がないこ とから誘電体多層膜の方が適している。 1 Z 4波長板 2903は偏波状態を変化 させる機能を持ち、 反射型偏光分離素子 2908で反射された光が 1 Z 4波長板 2 903を透過し、 ミラー 2902で反射して再度 1 Z 4波長板 2903を透過した光は、 高い割合で反射型偏光分離素子 2908を透過する。 [0191] Mira 1902 is made of a dielectric multilayer film, and the multilayer film is removed only at the light incident position from the optical fiber with lens / 2901, reflecting the return light of the periodic structure having the optical branching function. Has the effect of Although a mirror with an aluminum film attached on a transparent glass plate can be used, it is a flat mirror, and a dielectric multilayer film is more suitable because it does not absorb light. The 1 Z 4 wavelength plate 2903 has a function to change the polarization state. The light reflected by the reflective polarization separation element 2908 is transmitted through the 1 Z 4 wavelength plate 2 903, reflected by the mirror 2902, and again 1 Z 4 The light that has passed through the wave plate 2903 passes through the reflective polarization separation element 2908 at a high rate.
[0192] 本実施例の効果について説明する。 図 29に示す構成を用いれば、 ビームの 分岐と反射を繰り返すことで強度分布が均一化され、 かつ出力光は直線偏波 となる。 さらに平行ビームと全て平行に配置された反射素子と入射光を平行 に伝搬する複数のビームに分岐する光分岐機能を有する周期構造体を用いる ため、 出力光は同一方向に伝搬する多数の平行ビームの集合となり、 光が伝 搬した後の遠方でも強度分布は保持される。 一般に L D光源は干渉性が高く 照明として用いた場合スペックルが生じるが、 図 29に示す PC-0p lから出力さ れる光は、 通過した光路が異なる多数のビームの集合であり、 干渉性は緩和 されている。 [0192] The effect of the present embodiment will be described. If the configuration shown in Fig. 29 is used, the intensity distribution is made uniform by repeating the branching and reflection of the beam, and the output light is linearly polarized. Furthermore, since the reflecting element arranged in parallel with the parallel beam and a periodic structure having a light branching function for branching the incident light into a plurality of beams propagating in parallel, the output light has a number of parallel beams propagating in the same direction. The intensity distribution is maintained even in the distance after the light is transmitted. In general, the LD light source has high coherence, and speckles occur when used as illumination. However, the light output from PC-0pl shown in Fig. 29 is a set of many beams with different optical paths, and the coherence is It has been eased.
[0193] なお、 ミラー 2902と反射型偏光分離素子 2908の間に 1 Z 2波長板、 複屈折 結晶ウォークオフ偏光分離素子、 デボラライザ等偏光素子を揷入してもかま わない。 また光源としてレーザーダイオード (L D ) 、 L E Dを用いること も有効である。 Note that a polarizing element such as a 1 Z 2 wavelength plate, a birefringence crystal walk-off polarization separating element, or a depolarizer may be inserted between the mirror 2902 and the reflective polarization separating element 2908. It is also effective to use a laser diode (L D) or LED as the light source.
実施例 4 Example 4
[0194] 本発明の実施例 4に係る光吸収体および光電変換装置について、 図面を用 いて詳細に説明する。 本実施例は、 H型伝搬を利用した光吸収体および光電 変換装置である。 [0194] A light absorber and a photoelectric conversion device according to Example 4 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The present embodiment is a light absorber and photoelectric conversion device using H-type propagation.
[0195] 一般的な光電変換装置は半導体の光起電力効果 (半導体が光を吸収すると きに電子と正孔に分離される) の利用をその基本動作原理とする (非特許文 献 7を参照) 。 [0195] A general photoelectric conversion device uses the photovoltaic effect of a semiconductor (separated into electrons and holes when the semiconductor absorbs light) as its basic operation principle (non-patent document) (See item 7).
[0196] 半導体を用いた光電変換装置は、 一般的に半導体接合を用いてキャリアを 取り出す。 半導体の光吸収過程は、 帯間吸収、 帯 ·局在準位間吸収、 局在準 位間吸収、 帯内吸収に大別され、 帯間吸収、 帯 ·局在準位間吸収では自由キ ャリアが発生する。 局在準位間吸収、 帯内吸収は自由キャリア生成には関与 せず、 吸収されたフォトンのエネルギーは熱エネルギーに変換される。 [0196] In general, a photoelectric conversion device using a semiconductor extracts a carrier by using a semiconductor junction. Semiconductor light absorption processes are broadly divided into interband absorption, band-localized level absorption, localized level-level absorption, and intraband absorption. An area is generated. Localized interlevel absorption and in-band absorption are not involved in free carrier generation, and absorbed photon energy is converted into thermal energy.
[0197] 光電変換装置のエネルギー変換には損失が存在する。 この損失は、 上述す る自由キヤリァ生成部にフォ卜ンが 100%到達しないことによる第 1の損失と 、 自由キャリア生成部がフォトンを 100%吸収できないことによる第 2の損失 、 自由キャリア生成部が吸収したフォトンが 100%電気エネルギーに変換され ないことによる第 3の損失、 及び電気的な第 4の損失に分けられる。 [0197] There is a loss in the energy conversion of the photoelectric conversion device. This loss is due to the first loss due to the fact that the phone does not reach 100% of the free carrier generation unit, the second loss due to the fact that the free carrier generation unit cannot absorb 100% of the photons, the free carrier generation unit The photons absorbed by can not be converted into 100% electrical energy, and it is divided into the third loss and the fourth electrical loss.
[0198] 光電変換装置特に太陽電池などで用いられる光吸収体 (層) において、 光 の吸収効率を向上させるためには厚い光吸収層が必要であるが、 逆に厚い光 吸収層を用いた場合、 電子と正孔の再結合が生じ電気エネルギーへの変換効 率が低くなるジレンマがあった。 [0198] In light absorbers (layers) used in photoelectric conversion devices, particularly solar cells, a thick light absorption layer is necessary to improve the light absorption efficiency. Conversely, a thick light absorption layer was used. In some cases, there was a dilemma in which the recombination of electrons and holes resulted in a low conversion efficiency to electrical energy.
[0199] 一方、 H型伝搬 (A) 及び (B ) のように薄膜光学素子中の任意の位置に 対して、 面に垂直または任意の角度範囲で平面波を入射した場合に、 光学素 子の面内に光を伝搬させることが可能であるので、 単体では光吸収率の小さ な光吸収体 (膜) をもって大きな光吸収が可能になり、 ジレンマを解消でき る。 その際に用いる周期構造体の構成媒質は、 半導体、 透明導電体、 または 電解液などの流体が含まれることが必要である。 [0199] On the other hand, when a plane wave is incident on an arbitrary position in the thin film optical element as shown in H type propagation (A) and (B) perpendicular to the surface or in an arbitrary angular range, the optical element Since light can be propagated in-plane, a single light absorber (film) with a low light absorptance can absorb a large amount of light, eliminating the dilemma. The constituent medium of the periodic structure used at that time needs to contain a fluid such as a semiconductor, a transparent conductor, or an electrolytic solution.
[0200] 以上を踏まえて、 実施例 4に係る光電変換装置について、 図面を用いて詳 細に説明する。 図 3 0はアモルファス S i C (以下 「a-S i C」 ) と薄膜多結晶シ リコン (以下 r c-S i」 ) からなる 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 をベースにした光電変 換装置の側面模式図である。 図 30に示すように、 光電変換装置は、 ガラス基 板とガラス基板上に S i 02のバリア層 (以上、 図示せず) 、 ミラーを兼ねる裏面 電極 3001、 I T Oによる透明導電膜 (T C O ) 3002、 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 3003 、 透明導電膜 3004、 電極 3005および 3006、 S i 02層 3007を有する。 基本構造とし ては p-i-nZp-i-nZ■ ■ ■ Zp-i-nの 2端子接続スタック型である。 Based on the above, the photoelectric conversion device according to Example 4 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Figure 30 is a schematic side view of a photoelectric conversion device based on “2D-collapsed ACPC” consisting of amorphous SiC (hereinafter “aS i C”) and thin-film polycrystalline silicon (hereinafter “rcSi”). It is. As shown in FIG. 30, the photoelectric conversion device comprises a glass substrate and a glass substrate on which a Si 0 2 barrier layer (not shown), a back electrode 3001 that also serves as a mirror, and a transparent conductive film (TCO) made of ITO. 3002, “2D-collapsed ACPC” 3003, transparent conductive film 3004, electrodes 3005 and 3006, and SiO 2 layer 3007. Basic structure Pi-nZp-i-nZ ■ ■ ■ Zp-in two-terminal connection stack type.
[0201] 本実施例の特徴は主に以下の 3点である。 [0201] The features of the present embodiment are mainly the following three points.
( 1 ) Z方向に導電性を持ち、 かつ H型伝搬 (A) 、 (B) 及び (C) を示 す P h C 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 を用いる。 (1) Use Ph C “2D-collapse ACPC” which has conductivity in the Z direction and shows H-type propagation (A), (B) and (C).
(2) 外部から入射した光が、 H型伝搬 (A) 、 (B) 及び (C) により P h C内部に閉じこめられつつ伝搬し、 吸収されることによって、 バルクの材 料に比べ光吸収効率を増大させる。 (2) Light incident from outside propagates while being confined inside PhC by H-type propagation (A), (B), and (C), and is absorbed, thereby absorbing light compared to bulk materials. Increase efficiency.
(3) 上記により電子のバンド構造に由来する光の吸収率を、 フオトンのバ ンド構造と光の伝搬方向を制御することで補う。 (3) As described above, the light absorptivity derived from the electron band structure is compensated by controlling the photon band structure and the light propagation direction.
[0202] 具体的には面に垂直に入射 (_Z方向に入射) した光を面内 X方向で伝搬 させることによリフォトンを効率的に吸収させ、 土 Z方向にキャリアを取り 出す。 これにより、 より薄い光吸収層で十分な光吸収を可能にして、 電子と 正孔の再結合損失を抑制する。 また吸収端より長波長のフォトンのエネルギ 一利用を可能にする (帯■局在準位間吸収によって生じる自由キャリアの取 リ出しを可能にする) 。 [0202] Specifically, by allowing the light incident perpendicularly to the surface (incident in the _Z direction) to propagate in the in-plane X direction, the photons are efficiently absorbed and the carriers are extracted in the soil Z direction. Thus, a thinner light absorption layer enables sufficient light absorption and suppresses recombination loss of electrons and holes. In addition, the energy of photons having a wavelength longer than the absorption edge can be used (free carriers generated by absorption between bands and localized levels can be extracted).
[0203] 図 31は図 30に示す 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 3003の P r Cおよび BASを表す。 図 [0203] Figure 31 shows the PrC and BAS of "2D-collapse ACPC" 3003 shown in Figure 30. Figure
31 (a)は P r Cであり、 X方向と平行な一つめの P T V3101の長さは 350 n m 、 二つめの PTV3102の長さは 161 nmで X Y平面に対して 86度の角度をもち 、 かつ ΖΧ平面に対して平行であり、 三つめの P TVは Υ方向については一 様であり、 長さは一意に定義できない (任意) 。 符号 3103〜3106は格子点で ある。 図 31 (b)は B ASであり、 一つめの P T V3101と二つめの P T V3102 を含む面 (ここでは ZX平面と平行である) と平行で、 かつ三つめの P TV の中点を含む面による断面図である。 31 (a) is P r C, the length of the first PT V3101 parallel to the X direction is 350 nm, the length of the second PTV3102 is 161 nm, and has an angle of 86 degrees with respect to the XY plane. , And parallel to the ΖΧ plane, the third P TV is uniform in the Υ direction, and the length cannot be uniquely defined (optional). Reference numerals 3103 to 3106 denote lattice points. Fig. 31 (b) is a BAS, parallel to the plane containing the first PT V3101 and the second PT V3102 (here parallel to the ZX plane) and including the midpoint of the third P TV It is sectional drawing by a surface.
[0204] 図 31 (b)の BASは、 i型の// c-Siが占める領域 3107及び 3108、 n型// c-S iが占める領域 3109、 |3型3-3^が占める領域3110、 3111及び 3112からなる。 領域 3107と領域 3108は周期構造体としては連続する。 領域 3110、 3111及び 311 2についても同様である。 また屈折率分布としては領域 3107、 3108と領域 3109 は一体と見なせる。 i型の// c-Si層の厚さは約 100nm、 n型// c-Si層の厚さは 約 10nm、 p型 a-SiC層の厚さは約 50nmである。 [0204] The BAS in Fig. 31 (b) consists of regions 3107 and 3108 occupied by i-type // c-Si, region 3109 occupied by n-type // cSi, and region 3110 occupied by | 3-type 3-3 ^, 3111 and 3112. The region 3107 and the region 3108 are continuous as a periodic structure. The same applies to the regions 3110, 3111 and 3112. In terms of the refractive index distribution, the regions 3107 and 3108 and the region 3109 can be regarded as one body. The thickness of the i-type // c-Si layer is about 100nm, the thickness of the n-type // c-Si layer is About 10 nm, the thickness of the p-type a-SiC layer is about 50 nm.
[0205] 次に用いた媒質について説明する。 「a-SiC」 は、 p型半導体で E g=2.0 〜2.■leVかっn =2.■l (吸収端より長波長において) である。 一方// c-Siは、 E g½1.1eVかっn½3.4 (吸収端より長波長において) である。 「 c-Si」 層はノンドープの層と n型半導体の層に分かれているが、 屈折率に関しては 同等であり、 P h Cとしてフォトンに対する振る舞いを検討する場合は一体 と見なせる。 Next, the medium used will be described. “A-SiC” is a p-type semiconductor with E g = 2.0 to 2.leV and n = 2. ■ l (at a wavelength longer than the absorption edge). On the other hand, // c-Si is E g½1.1 eV n ½3.4 (at a wavelength longer than the absorption edge). The “c-Si” layer is divided into a non-doped layer and an n-type semiconductor layer, but the refractive index is the same, and can be regarded as one when considering the behavior of photons as P h C.
[0206] 本実施例では P h Cにおける高屈折率媒質として// c-Siを用いたが、 n = 3程度の媒質であれば代替えできる。 例えばまた// c-Siに変えて a-S Hを用 いることも有効である。 「a-S H」 は、 c-Siに比べ、 可視領域での光吸収 率が高いが、 電気的な特性 (キャリア輸送特性) で劣り、 少数キャリア拡散 長は 100nm以下とされる (非特許文献 7を参照) 。 しかしながら、 P h Cによ る a-S Hを用いた可視光から 2000nm程度の光吸収体の P r Cと BASでは a-S i: H層の厚さは 100nm以下でよいので、 P h Cによる光電変換装置においては 、 a-S Hの問題点を抑制しつつ、 利点 (吸収端より長波長側でのすそ吸収が 大きい、 バンドギャップエネルギーが大きい、 等) を利用できる。 なお透明 波長帯で n≥3を満たす材料としては、 S i、 Ge、 SiGe、 ガリウム砒素、 アルミニウムガリウム砒素化合物などの半導体があげられる。 [0206] In this example, // c-Si was used as the high refractive index medium in P h C, but any medium with n = 3 can be substituted. For example, it is also effective to use a-SH instead of // c-Si. “AS H” has a higher light absorption rate in the visible region than c-Si, but is inferior in electrical characteristics (carrier transport characteristics) and has a minority carrier diffusion length of 100 nm or less (Non-patent Document 7) See). However, in Pr C and BAS, which are light absorbers from visible light using aS H with P h C, the thickness of the aS i: H layer can be 100 nm or less, so photoelectric conversion with P h C In the device, while suppressing the problems of aSH, it is possible to use the advantages (large bottom absorption on the longer wavelength side than the absorption edge, large band gap energy, etc.). Examples of materials that satisfy n≥3 in the transparent wavelength band include semiconductors such as Si, Ge, SiGe, gallium arsenide, and aluminum gallium arsenide compounds.
[0207] 本実施例における理想的な光吸収層 ( i層) の材料を述べると、 以下の 5 点が挙げられる [0207] The material of the ideal light absorption layer (i layer) in this example is described as follows.
(1 ) 電子のバンドギャップエネルギーが大きい。 (1) The band gap energy of electrons is large.
(2) 吸収係数が吸収端より長波長側になるに従い、 急激に減少せずなだら かに減少する (すそ吸収が大きい。 帯■局在準位間吸収がある) 。 (2) As the absorption coefficient becomes longer than the absorption edge, the absorption coefficient does not decrease suddenly but decreases gently (absorptive absorption is large. Band ■ there is absorption between localized levels).
(3) 屈折率が大きい (n≥3である。 ) (3) Refractive index is large (n≥3)
(4) 抵抗率が小さい。 (4) Low resistivity.
(5) p型透明導電膜との間に電気的な接合が可能である。 (5) Electrical bonding is possible with the p-type transparent conductive film.
[0208] 次に窓層 (フオトンを吸収せず、 かつ電気伝導性を有する層) について説 明する。 「a-SiC」 は広バンドギャップの半導体であり、 太陽光スぺクトル領 域での光吸収が小さく太陽光に対する光電変換装置での窓層としての利用に 適するが、 a-SiCに替えて a-SiOを用いることも可能である (非特許文献 7を 参照) 。 [0208] Next, the window layer (a layer that does not absorb photon and has electrical conductivity) will be described. “A-SiC” is a wide-bandgap semiconductor and has a solar spectrum. Light absorption in the region is small and suitable for use as a window layer in a photoelectric conversion device for sunlight, but a-SiO can be used instead of a-SiC (see Non-Patent Document 7).
[0209] 次に本実施例の全体の構成について述べる。 まず平板の厚さ 5 mmの白板 ガラス上に、 Si02のバリアー層を成膜し、 その上に金属電極を形成する。 さら にその上に I TOをスパッタリングで 500nm程度積層する。 次いで前記 I TO 層に感光レジス卜とマスク露光を用いたパターニングを行いエッチングによ リビラミツド型の凸凹を形成する。 その後、 バイアススパッタリングで I T Oによる三角形状の整形層を積層する。 ついで以下の工程 (1 ) 〜 (3) を 1 1周期またはそれ以上繰り返す。 Next, the overall configuration of the present embodiment will be described. First, the white plate glass 5 mm thick flat plate, forming a barrier layer of Si0 2, to form a metal electrode thereon. Furthermore, about 500 nm of ITO is laminated on it by sputtering. Next, patterning is performed on the I TO layer using a photosensitive resist film and mask exposure, and a relief type unevenness is formed by etching. After that, a triangular shaped layer of ITO is laminated by bias sputtering. Next, the following steps (1) to (3) are repeated for one cycle or more.
[0210] ( 1 ) スパッタデポジションで a-Siを 10nm積層し、 エキシマーレーザーでァ ニーリングを行い多結晶化し、 その後イオン注入とランプアニールによる不 純物ドーピングを行うことで n型// C-Siを形成する。 なお n層への不純物ド 一ビングは r f スパッタリングによる成膜時にアルゴン、 水素、 PH3混合ガ スを用いることで行うことやターゲッ卜に当該不純物を添加したものを用い ることも可能である [0210] (1) 10 nm of a-Si is deposited by sputter deposition, polycrystallized by annealing with an excimer laser, and then doped with impurities by ion implantation and lamp annealing to form n-type // C- Si is formed. In addition, impurity doping to the n layer can be performed by using argon, hydrogen, PH 3 mixed gas at the time of film formation by rf sputtering, or a target to which the impurity is added can be used.
[0211] (2) スパッタデポジションで a-Siを 100nm積層し、 エキシマーレーザーでァ ニーリングを行い多結晶化する。 [0211] (2) Laminate 100nm of a-Si by sputtering deposition and anneal with an excimer laser to polycrystallize.
[0212] (3) a-SiCを上述する自己クローニング法に従い成膜する。 「a-SiC」 は、 S iC焼結体ターゲットをアルゴン、 C2H2で r f バイアススパッタリングすること で成膜する。 他の方法としては、 S iターゲッ卜をアルゴン、 C2H2で r f スパ ッタリングすることでも得られる (反応性スパッタリング) 。 なお、 SiCには アルミニウムを不純物としてドープしてあり p型半導体とする。 [0212] (3) A-SiC is formed according to the self-cloning method described above. “A-SiC” is formed by rf bias sputtering of a SiC target with argon and C 2 H 2 . Another method can be obtained by rf sputtering of Si target with argon and C 2 H 2 (reactive sputtering). In addition, SiC is doped with aluminum as an impurity to make a p-type semiconductor.
[0213] 最後に、 凸凹を埋める条件 (バイアス量を多くする) で、 I TO層をバイ ァススパッタリングにて成膜する。 この I TO層の上に櫛形金属電極を形成 することにより、 図 30に示す構造は完成する。 さらに反射防止層として Si 02膜 を任意の製膜方法で形成することも有効である。 本実施例では、 r f スパッ タリングによって 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 層が形成されるが、 ほかにも EC Rスパ ッタ、 C V D法とエッチングの組み合わせによっても実現可能である。 [0213] Finally, an ITO layer is formed by bias sputtering under the condition for filling the irregularities (increasing the bias amount). The structure shown in FIG. 30 is completed by forming a comb-shaped metal electrode on this ITO layer. Further, it is also effective to form a Si 0 2 film as an antireflection layer by an arbitrary film forming method. In this example, a “2D-collapsed ACPC” layer is formed by rf sputtering. This can also be realized by a combination of a sputtering method, a CVD method and etching.
[0214] 本実施例では p層側から光を入射しているが、 これは正孔の輸送特性が電 子の輸送特性に劣り、 p層側から光を入射する方が有利であるためである ( 非特許文献 7を参照) 。 また、 本実施例における// c-S i層の 1層は 100nmで通 常の// c-S iを用いた薄膜多層膜太陽電池の膜厚 (100 m以上) に比べ薄いが 、 光が// c-S iの表面付近で特に強く吸収され電子正孔対を生成すること、 電 子正孔対を分離し接合部に移動させることから、 光吸収は接合に近い部分で 行われることが望ましく、 本実施例のように// c-S i層の 1層が薄いことは高 効率化にとって有利である。 また、 本実施例では 「2D-横崩し ACPC」 としたが 、 「3D-横崩し ACPC」 をもちいれば、 より広い波長帯域で高効率な光吸収が可 能になる。 [0214] In this example, light is incident from the p layer side because the hole transport property is inferior to the electron transport property, and it is more advantageous to enter light from the p layer side. Yes (see Non-Patent Document 7). In addition, one of the // cSi layers in this example is thinner than the film thickness (100 m or more) of a thin film multilayer solar cell using normal // cSi at 100 nm, but the light is // cS. It is desirable that light absorption be performed near the junction because the generation of electron-hole pairs is particularly strongly absorbed near the surface of i, and the electron-hole pairs are separated and moved to the junction. As shown in the example, the thinness of one // cSi layer is advantageous for higher efficiency. In this embodiment, “2D-collapse ACPC” is used. However, if “3D-collapse ACPC” is used, light can be efficiently absorbed in a wider wavelength band.
[0215] 次に、 P h C部の P r Cと B A Sについて補足する。 図 30の光電変換装置 中の P h C部について、 nの分布がほぼ同一で電気的に異なる構成が可能に なる。 高屈折率部が P型 a-S H、 i型 a-S H、 n型 a-S Hによる多層膜で、 低屈折率部が Sn02の P r Cと B A Sであっても、 フォトニックバンド構造はほ ぼ同一になり、 電気的な接続もなされるので図 30と同様に優れた光電変換装 置を実現できる。 [0215] Next, P r C and BAS in the P h C part will be supplemented. In the P h C part in the photoelectric conversion device of Fig. 30, a configuration in which the distribution of n is almost the same and electrically different is possible. The high refractive index portion is P-type aS H, i-type aS H, a multilayer film by n-type aS H, be a low refractive index portion is Sn0 2 of P r C and BAS, the photonic band structure is almost identical As shown in FIG. 30, an excellent photoelectric conversion device can be realized because electrical connection is made.
[0216] また、 I T Oに代えて Sn02や ZnOを用いることも有効である。 [0216] Further, it is effective to use a Sn0 2 or ZnO instead of ITO.
[0217] さらに本実施例では 1種類の P r Cと B A Sによる周期構造体を用いたが 、 解決の手段において述べたように、 異なる P r Cと B A Sによる周期構造 体を Z方向に複数接続すること等で、 より広い波長で入射光を薄膜面内に伝 搬させ効率的に光電変換することも可能である。 異なる P r Cと B A Sとし ては、 基本格子べクトルの長さが異なるものは膜厚を変えることで、 基本格 子べクトルの方向が異なるものは堆積粒子又はエッチング粒子の入射方向を 変えることで実現可能である。 また、 屈折率分布の異なる B A Sとしては、 堆積粒子やドーパントを変えることで実現可能である。 特に i層の堆積粒子 を変えることが有効で、 従来の太陽電池におけるスタック型に相当する効果 が得られる。 [0218] 電極による光の遮蔽を最小限に抑えるため、 外部にプリズマティックカバ 一 (非特許文献 7を参照) を加えることが有効である。 プリズマティック力 バーの屈折率が小さければ周期構造体 3003からプリズマティックカバーに漏 れる光は十分小さい。 [0217] Furthermore, in this example, one type of periodic structure consisting of P r C and BAS was used, but as described in the solution section, multiple periodic structures of different P r C and BAS are connected in the Z direction. By doing so, it is possible to efficiently carry out photoelectric conversion by propagating incident light at a wider wavelength within the thin film surface. For different PrC and BAS, change the film thickness when the length of the basic lattice vector is different, and change the incident direction of the deposited particles or etching particles when the direction of the basic lattice vector is different. It is feasible. In addition, BAS with a different refractive index distribution can be realized by changing the deposited particles and dopant. In particular, it is effective to change the deposited particles in the i layer, and the effect equivalent to the stack type in conventional solar cells can be obtained. [0218] In order to minimize light shielding by the electrodes, it is effective to add a prismatic cover (see Non-Patent Document 7) outside. Prismatic force If the refractive index of the bar is small, light leaking from the periodic structure 3003 to the prismatic cover is sufficiently small.
実施例 5 Example 5
[0219] 本発明の実施例 16に係る一部に流体を用いた周期構造体について、 図面を 用いて詳細に説明する。 本実施例は AC-PhC以外の第 1から第 10の発明に該当 する周期構造体である。 [0219] A periodic structure using a fluid in part according to Example 16 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. This example is a periodic structure corresponding to the first to tenth inventions other than AC-PhC.
[0220] 図 32は T i 02、 Sn02、 ヨウ素溶液を用いて作製した 3次元 P h Cの断面図であ る。 符号 3201は T i 02、 符号 3202は Sn02、 符号 3203はヨウ素溶液、 符号 3204は基 板をそれぞれ表す。 周期構造体の P T Vは X方向、 Y方向および X Y平面に 対して 86度傾いた方向にある。 [0220] FIG. 32 is T i 0 2, Sn0 2, Ru sectional view der 3D P h C prepared by using iodine solution. Reference numeral 3201 represents T i 0 2 , reference numeral 3202 represents Sn0 2 , reference numeral 3203 represents an iodine solution, and reference numeral 3204 represents a substrate. The PTV of the periodic structure is in the direction inclined by 86 degrees with respect to the X, Y, and XY planes.
[0221 ] 本実施例の特徴は、 媒質の 1つとして流体を用いており、 流体が外部と交 換可能であることである。 液体を用いた光デバイスとしては湿式太陽電池な どの例があるが、 液体として電解液、 特にヨウ素溶液を用い、 外部に電極を 接続すれば、 図 32に示す周期構造体も湿色太陽電池として動作する。 製造方 法としては、 Sn02と T i 02の多層膜を形成した後に、 流体を注入できる穴をあけ るか又は溝を形成する (特許文献 6を参照) 。 [0221] A feature of the present embodiment is that a fluid is used as one of the media, and the fluid can be exchanged with the outside. Examples of liquid optical devices include wet solar cells, but if an electrolyte, especially iodine solution, is used as the liquid and an electrode is connected to the outside, the periodic structure shown in Fig. 32 is also used as a wet color solar cell. Operate. The manufacturing how, Sn0 after forming the 2 and T i 0 2 of the multilayer film to form a Luke or grooves drilled capable of injecting a fluid (see Patent Document 6).
[0222] 本実施形態のように媒質の 1つが流体である場合、 伝搬特性を可変にでき ることや化学的反応を周期構造体内部で生じさせることができる利点がある 次に、 光の伝搬について説明する。 本実施形態においても、 Z方向から入 射した光は周期構造体内で X方向に伝搬する。 X方向への伝搬は光を周期構 造体内に閉じこめることに等しく、 変換効率の高い湿式太陽電池となる。 産業上の利用可能性 [0222] When one of the media is a fluid as in this embodiment, there are advantages that the propagation characteristics can be made variable and that a chemical reaction can be generated inside the periodic structure. Will be described. Also in this embodiment, light incident from the Z direction propagates in the X direction within the periodic structure. Propagation in the X direction is equivalent to confining light in the periodic structure, resulting in a wet solar cell with high conversion efficiency. Industrial applicability
[0223] 本発明は、 例えば光分岐、 分光、 光記録といった光学操作などの分野にお いて好適に用いることができる。 [0223] The present invention can be suitably used in the field of optical operations such as optical branching, spectroscopy, and optical recording.
Claims
Priority Applications (1)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2008506175A JP4954975B2 (en) | 2006-03-17 | 2007-03-16 | Periodic structure, method for producing periodic structure, and applied product |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2006-073912 | 2006-03-17 | ||
| JP2006073912 | 2006-03-17 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2007108212A1 true WO2007108212A1 (en) | 2007-09-27 |
Family
ID=38522248
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2007/000239 Ceased WO2007108212A1 (en) | 2006-03-17 | 2007-03-16 | Periodic structure and method for manufacturing periodic structure and application product |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| JP (1) | JP4954975B2 (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2007108212A1 (en) |
Cited By (9)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2008124230A (en) * | 2006-11-13 | 2008-05-29 | Kaneka Corp | Photoelectric conversion device |
| JP2009276447A (en) * | 2008-05-13 | 2009-11-26 | Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd | Polarizer and liquid crystal projector |
| WO2011048952A1 (en) * | 2009-10-22 | 2011-04-28 | 日本電気株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| WO2011048951A1 (en) * | 2009-10-22 | 2011-04-28 | 日本電気株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| WO2011083803A1 (en) * | 2010-01-07 | 2011-07-14 | 日本電気株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| US9324891B2 (en) | 2010-01-07 | 2016-04-26 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Solar cell, solar cell panel, and device comprising solar cell |
| JP2017003580A (en) * | 2015-06-09 | 2017-01-05 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Light detection device and light detection system |
| JP2017181256A (en) * | 2016-03-30 | 2017-10-05 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Photodetection device and photodetection system |
| CN113848605A (en) * | 2021-11-16 | 2021-12-28 | 电子科技大学 | Narrowband Optical Polarization Converter Based on Dielectric Metasurface |
Citations (7)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2002162653A (en) * | 2000-11-29 | 2002-06-07 | Minolta Co Ltd | Three-dimensional photonic crystal and method of manufacturing for the same as well as optical element |
| JP2002304760A (en) * | 2001-04-06 | 2002-10-18 | Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd | Wavelength multiplex optical recording head |
| JP2003050325A (en) * | 2001-08-06 | 2003-02-21 | Nec Corp | Wavelength demultiplexer |
| JP2004077885A (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2004-03-11 | Fuji Xerox Co Ltd | Photonic crystal and its manufacturing method, and functional element |
| JP2004325903A (en) * | 2003-04-25 | 2004-11-18 | Photonic Lattice Inc | Wavelength multiplexer / demultiplexer and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP2005045162A (en) * | 2003-07-25 | 2005-02-17 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP2006064878A (en) * | 2004-08-25 | 2006-03-09 | Nec Tokin Corp | Optical device and method of controlling light |
Family Cites Families (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP3766844B2 (en) * | 1999-09-25 | 2006-04-19 | 有限会社オートクローニング・テクノロジー | Lattice modulation photonic crystal |
-
2007
- 2007-03-16 JP JP2008506175A patent/JP4954975B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2007-03-16 WO PCT/JP2007/000239 patent/WO2007108212A1/en not_active Ceased
Patent Citations (7)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2002162653A (en) * | 2000-11-29 | 2002-06-07 | Minolta Co Ltd | Three-dimensional photonic crystal and method of manufacturing for the same as well as optical element |
| JP2002304760A (en) * | 2001-04-06 | 2002-10-18 | Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd | Wavelength multiplex optical recording head |
| JP2003050325A (en) * | 2001-08-06 | 2003-02-21 | Nec Corp | Wavelength demultiplexer |
| JP2004077885A (en) * | 2002-08-20 | 2004-03-11 | Fuji Xerox Co Ltd | Photonic crystal and its manufacturing method, and functional element |
| JP2004325903A (en) * | 2003-04-25 | 2004-11-18 | Photonic Lattice Inc | Wavelength multiplexer / demultiplexer and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP2005045162A (en) * | 2003-07-25 | 2005-02-17 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | Semiconductor device and manufacturing method thereof |
| JP2006064878A (en) * | 2004-08-25 | 2006-03-09 | Nec Tokin Corp | Optical device and method of controlling light |
Non-Patent Citations (3)
| Title |
|---|
| HANAIZUMI O. ET AL.: "Photonic Kessho to Kino Zairyo no Fukugo Gijutsu", THE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRONICS, INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERS ELECTRONICS SOCIETY TAIKAI KOEN RONBUNSHU 1, 7 September 2000 (2000-09-07), pages 182 - 183, XP003017833 * |
| KAWAKAMI S. ET AL.: "Hikari Sangyo no Kyotsu Tool to shiteno Photonic Kessho", OYO BUTSURI, vol. 74, no. 2, 10 February 2005 (2005-02-10), pages 180 - 185, XP003017831 * |
| SABARINATHAN J. ET AL.: "Room Temperature Operation of an Electrically Injected Single-Defect Photonic Bandgap Microcavity Surface Emitting Laser", IEEE LASERS AND ELECTRO-OPTICS SOCIETY 2000 ANNUAL MEETING, vol. 1, 13 November 2000 (2000-11-13), pages 370 - 371, XP003017832 * |
Cited By (18)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2008124230A (en) * | 2006-11-13 | 2008-05-29 | Kaneka Corp | Photoelectric conversion device |
| JP2009276447A (en) * | 2008-05-13 | 2009-11-26 | Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd | Polarizer and liquid crystal projector |
| US8643050B2 (en) | 2009-10-22 | 2014-02-04 | Nec Corporation | Light emitting element and image display apparatus using the light emitting element |
| WO2011048952A1 (en) * | 2009-10-22 | 2011-04-28 | 日本電気株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| WO2011048951A1 (en) * | 2009-10-22 | 2011-04-28 | 日本電気株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| CN102576791A (en) * | 2009-10-22 | 2012-07-11 | 日本电气株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| CN102576791B (en) * | 2009-10-22 | 2014-11-19 | 日本电气株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| US8866172B2 (en) | 2009-10-22 | 2014-10-21 | Nec Corporation | Light emitting element and image display apparatus using the light emitting element |
| WO2011083803A1 (en) * | 2010-01-07 | 2011-07-14 | 日本電気株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| US8779454B2 (en) | 2010-01-07 | 2014-07-15 | Nec Corporation | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| JPWO2011083803A1 (en) * | 2010-01-07 | 2013-05-13 | 日本電気株式会社 | LIGHT EMITTING ELEMENT AND IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE USING THE LIGHT EMITTING ELEMENT |
| CN102714257A (en) * | 2010-01-07 | 2012-10-03 | 日本电气株式会社 | Light emitting element and image display device using the light emitting element |
| US9324891B2 (en) | 2010-01-07 | 2016-04-26 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Solar cell, solar cell panel, and device comprising solar cell |
| JP2017003580A (en) * | 2015-06-09 | 2017-01-05 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Light detection device and light detection system |
| JP2017053866A (en) * | 2015-06-09 | 2017-03-16 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Photodetection device and photodetection system |
| JP2018066744A (en) * | 2015-06-09 | 2018-04-26 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Optical detection device and optical detection system |
| JP2017181256A (en) * | 2016-03-30 | 2017-10-05 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Photodetection device and photodetection system |
| CN113848605A (en) * | 2021-11-16 | 2021-12-28 | 电子科技大学 | Narrowband Optical Polarization Converter Based on Dielectric Metasurface |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| JP4954975B2 (en) | 2012-06-20 |
| JPWO2007108212A1 (en) | 2009-08-06 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| JP4954975B2 (en) | Periodic structure, method for producing periodic structure, and applied product | |
| Zhou et al. | Efficient silicon metasurfaces for visible light | |
| Cordaro et al. | Antireflection high-index metasurfaces combining Mie and Fabry-Pérot resonances | |
| Ng et al. | Plasmonic Near‐Complete Optical Absorption and Its Applications | |
| Eyderman et al. | Near perfect solar absorption in ultra-thin-film GaAs photonic crystals | |
| Mallick et al. | Optimal light trapping in ultra-thin photonic crystal crystalline silicon solar cells | |
| Raja et al. | Photon recycling in perovskite solar cells and its impact on device design | |
| JP5916823B2 (en) | Solar cell, solar panel and device with solar cell | |
| Burresi et al. | Complex photonic structures for light harvesting | |
| US8093139B2 (en) | Method for fabrication of aligned nanowire structures in semiconductor materials for electronic, optoelectronic, photonic and plasmonic devices | |
| KR101390401B1 (en) | Fabricating method of antireflection gratings pattern | |
| CN106483594A (en) | Colored filter and application based on the super surface of silicon and nanostructured metal film | |
| JP2009533875A (en) | Solar cell efficiency through periodicity | |
| US20120224148A1 (en) | Light emitting element, light source device, and projection display device | |
| JP5938241B2 (en) | Optical element and manufacturing method thereof | |
| US20170068214A1 (en) | Plasmonic multicolor meta-hologram | |
| Wen et al. | Multifunctional silicon optoelectronics integrated with plasmonic scattering color | |
| US20130033678A1 (en) | Optical element, light source device, and projection display device | |
| Durmaz et al. | Thin silicon interference solar cells for targeted or broadband wavelength absorption enhancement | |
| Wang et al. | Innovative high-performance nanowire-grid polarizers and integrated isolators | |
| CN110196546A (en) | Nonreciprocity asymmetric transmission wavefront modification method based on the super clever surface of multilayer | |
| Bauser et al. | Amorphous silicon carbide high contrast gratings as highly efficient spectrally selective visible reflectors | |
| JP2003279707A (en) | Structure of antireflection film to one-dimensional photonic crystal and its forming method | |
| Liu et al. | Design of a high-efficiency broadband solar absorber utilizing Two-Dimensional photonic crystals for enhanced solar energy harvesting | |
| Collin et al. | Upper bounds on broadband absorption |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 07736896 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
| ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2008506175 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
| NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
| 122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 07736896 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |